EC

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 760 Pages, 20.32MB

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
B ENGINE

EC A

SECTION

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C

CONTENTS

INDEX FOR DTC ....................................................... 9 NATS) ....................................................................... 46 F

DTC No. Index ........................................................ 9 Description ............................................................. 46

Alphabetical Index ................................................. 13 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ........... 47

PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 17 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System

Introduction ............................................................ 47 G Two Trip Detection Logic ....................................... 47

(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-

Emission-related Diagnostic Information ............... 48

SIONER" ............................................................... 17 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) .......................... 63 OBD System Operation Chart ............................... 66

A/T ......................................................................... 17 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 71

Precaution ............................................................. 17 PREPARATION ........................................................ 21

Basic Inspection .................................................... 71 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check ................... 76 I

Special Service Tools ............................................ 21 VIN Registration .................................................... 77

Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 22 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ..... 77

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 23 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 78 J

System Diagram .................................................... 23 Idle Air Volume Learning ....................................... 78

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 24 Fuel Pressure Check ............................................. 80

Electronic Ignition (EI) System .............................. 26 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ........................................... 82 K

Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine

Trouble Diagnosis Introduction .............................. 82

Speed) ................................................................... 27 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 88

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 28 Input/Output Signal Chart ...................................... 28

Fail-Safe Chart ...................................................... 90 Symptom Matrix Chart ........................................... 91 L

System Description ............................................... 28 Engine Control Component Parts Location ........... 95

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 29 Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................ 102

System Description ............................................... 29 Circuit Diagram .................................................... 103 M

Component Description ......................................... 30 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout .......... 105

CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 31 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 105

System Description ............................................... 31 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) ......................... 115

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ...................... 32 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ...................... 127

Description ............................................................ 32 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode

Component Inspection .......................................... 35

. 129

How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 36 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY

Mode .................................................................... 133

(ORVR) ..................................................................... 38 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 135

System Description ............................................... 38 Description ........................................................... 135

Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 39 Testing Condition ................................................. 135

Component Inspection .......................................... 41 Inspection Procedure ........................................... 135

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................ 44 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 136

Description ............................................................ 44 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-

Component Inspection .......................................... 44 DENT ...................................................................... 145

IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-

Revision: 2005 November

EC-1

2006 Q45

Description ........................................................... 145 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 145 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .......... 146 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 146 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 149 Ground Inspection ............................................... 154 Component Inspection ......................................... 155 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 156 Description ........................................................... 156 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 156 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 156 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 157 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 158 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION .................... 159 Description ........................................................... 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 159 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 159 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 160 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ....................... 161 Description ........................................................... 161 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 162 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 162 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 163 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 164 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 167 Component Inspection ......................................... 171 Removal and Installation ..................................... 172 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ................................................................. 173 Description ........................................................... 173 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 173 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 173 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 173 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 174 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 177 Component Inspection ......................................... 179 Removal and Installation ..................................... 179 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 180 Description ........................................................... 180 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 180 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 180 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 181 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 182 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 185 Component Inspection ......................................... 187 Removal and Installation ..................................... 187 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .................................................................... 188 Component Description ....................................... 188 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 188 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 188 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 188 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 189 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 193

Component Inspection .........................................194 Removal and Installation ......................................194 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ....................................195 Component Description .......................................195 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.195 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................195 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................196 Overall Function Check ........................................197 Wiring Diagram ....................................................198 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................199 Component Inspection .........................................201 Removal and Installation ......................................203 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ........................204 Component Description .......................................204 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.204 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................204 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................205 Wiring Diagram ....................................................206 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................207 Component Inspection .........................................209 Removal and Installation ......................................210 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 211 Component Description ....................................... 211 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 211 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 211 Wiring Diagram ....................................................212 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................213 Component Inspection .........................................214 Removal and Installation ......................................214 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .........................215 Component Description .......................................215 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................215 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................216 Wiring Diagram ....................................................217 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................218 Component Inspection .........................................219 Removal and Installation ......................................220 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ...........................221 Component Description .......................................221 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.221 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................221 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................222 Wiring Diagram ....................................................223 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................224 Component Inspection .........................................227 Removal and Installation ......................................227 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR .....................................228 Component Description .......................................228 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................228 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................229 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................229 Component Inspection .........................................230 Removal and Installation ......................................230 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR .......................................231 Component Description .......................................231 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................231

Revision: 2005 November

EC-2

2006 Q45

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 231 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 232 Component Inspection ........................................ 233 Removal and Installation ..................................... 233 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ............... 234 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 234 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 234 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 234 Component Inspection ........................................ 235 Removal and Installation ..................................... 235 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................... 236 Component Description ....................................... 236 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 236 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 236 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 236 Overall Function Check ....................................... 237 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 239 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 242 Removal and Installation ..................................... 245 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................... 246 Component Description ....................................... 246 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 246 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 246 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 246 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 248 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 251 Removal and Installation ..................................... 254 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................... 255 Component Description ....................................... 255 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 255 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 255 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 255 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 257 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 260 Removal and Installation ..................................... 263 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................... 264 Component Description ....................................... 264 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 264 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 264 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 265 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 267 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 270 Removal and Installation ..................................... 275 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ................................... 276 Component Description ....................................... 276 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 276 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 276 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 277 Overall Function Check ....................................... 277 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 279 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 282 Component Inspection ........................................ 286 Removal and Installation ..................................... 287 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ................................... 288

Component Description ....................................... 288

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 288

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 288

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 289 EC Overall Function Check ....................................... 290

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 292

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 295 Component Inspection ......................................... 302 C

Removal and Installation ..................................... 303

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .................................... 304

Component Description ....................................... 304 D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 304

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 304 E DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 305

Overall Function Check ....................................... 305

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 307 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 310 F

Component Inspection ......................................... 314

Removal and Installation ..................................... 315

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

FUNCTION ............................................................. 316

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 316

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 316 H Wiring Diagram .................................................... 318

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 322

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION ............................................................. 328

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 328

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 328 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 330 J

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 334

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ..................................... 339

Component Description ....................................... 339 K On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 339

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 339

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 341 L Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 342

Component Inspection ......................................... 343

Removal and Installation ..................................... 343 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 344 M

Component Description ....................................... 344

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 344

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 344

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 345

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 346

Component Inspection ......................................... 347

Removal and Installation ..................................... 347

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 348

Component Description ....................................... 348

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 348

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 348

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 349

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 350

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 351

Component Inspection ......................................... 354

Removal and Installation ..................................... 354

Revision: 2005 November

EC-3

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE .................... 355
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 355 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 356 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 357 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................. 365 Component Description ....................................... 365 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 365 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 365 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 366 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 367 Component Inspection ......................................... 368 Removal and Installation ..................................... 369 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ......................... 370 Component Description ....................................... 370 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 370 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 370 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 371 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 372 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 375 Component Inspection ......................................... 378 Removal and Installation ..................................... 378 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .................... 379 Component Description ....................................... 379 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 379 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 380 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 381 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 382 Component Inspection ......................................... 385 Removal and Installation ..................................... 385 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ....................................................................... 386 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 386 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 386 Overall Function Check ....................................... 387 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 388 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 391 System Description .............................................. 391 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 391 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 391 Overall Function Check ....................................... 392 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 393 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 396 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 396 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 397 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 398 Component Inspection ......................................... 403 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................. 404 Description ........................................................... 404 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 404 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 405 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 405 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 406 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 408 Component Inspection ......................................... 411 Removal and Installation ..................................... 411

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .....................412
Description ...........................................................412 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.412 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................413 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................413 Wiring Diagram ....................................................414 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................416 Component Inspection .........................................417 Removal and Installation ......................................418 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE .....................................................................419 Component Description .......................................419 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.419 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................419 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................420 Overall Function Check ........................................421 Wiring Diagram ....................................................423 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................424 Component Inspection .........................................428 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE .....................................................................430 Component Description .......................................430 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.430 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................430 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................431 Wiring Diagram ....................................................432 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................433 Component Inspection .........................................435 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................436 Component Description .......................................436 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.436 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................436 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................437 Wiring Diagram ....................................................438 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................439 Component Inspection .........................................442 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................443 Component Description .......................................443 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.443 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................443 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................444 Wiring Diagram ....................................................445 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................446 Component Inspection .........................................450 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................451 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................451 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................452 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................453 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................459 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................459 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................460

Revision: 2005 November

EC-4

2006 Q45

Overall Function Check ....................................... 461 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 462 Component Inspection ........................................ 467 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ..................... 468 Component Description ....................................... 468 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 468 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 468 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 469 Removal and Installation ..................................... 469 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ..................... 470 Component Description ....................................... 470 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 470 Overall Function Check ....................................... 470 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 471 Removal and Installation ..................................... 471 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......... 472 Component Description ....................................... 472 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 472 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 472 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 473 Removal and Installation ..................................... 473 DTC P0500 VSS .................................................... 474 Description .......................................................... 474 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 474 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 474 Overall Function Check ....................................... 475 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 475 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ...................................... 476 Description .......................................................... 476 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 476 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 476 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 477 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ...................................... 478 Description .......................................................... 478 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 478 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 478 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 479 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR .................................... 480 Component Description ....................................... 480 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 480 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 480 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 480 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 481 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 482 Component Inspection ........................................ 484 Removal and Installation ..................................... 484 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ...................... 485 Component Description ....................................... 485 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 485 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 485 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 486 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 487 DTC P0605 ECM ................................................... 489 Component Description ....................................... 489 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 489 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 489 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 490 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ............... 492

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 492

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 492 A

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 493

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 495

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ..................................... 497 EC Component Description ....................................... 497

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 497 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 497 C

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 497

Overall Function Check ....................................... 498

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 499 D

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 500

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SEN-

SOR ........................................................................ 502 E Component Description ....................................... 502

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 502 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 502 F

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 502

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 504

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 507 G

Component Inspection ......................................... 510

Removal and Installation ..................................... 510

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ... 511 H On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 511

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ......................... 512

Description ........................................................... 512 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 512

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 512

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 512 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ........... 513 J

Description ........................................................... 513

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 513

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 513 K Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 513

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 514

Description ........................................................... 514 L CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 515

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 516 Overall Function Check ....................................... 516 M

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 519

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 520

Main 13 Causes of Overheating .......................... 532

Component Inspection ......................................... 532

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE

(FPCM) ................................................................... 534

Description ........................................................... 534

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 534

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 534

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 535

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 536

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 537

Component Inspection ......................................... 540

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ....................................... 542

Component Description ....................................... 542

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 542

Revision: 2005 November

EC-5

2006 Q45

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 542 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 543 Removal and Installation ..................................... 543 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ....................................... 544 Component Description ....................................... 544 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 544 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 544 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 545 Removal and Installation ..................................... 545 DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 546 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 546 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 547 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 548 Component Inspection ......................................... 553 DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 554 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 554 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 555 Overall Function Check ....................................... 556 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 557 Component Inspection ......................................... 562 DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE. 563 Description ........................................................... 563 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 563 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 563 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 564 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 565 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 566 Component Inspection ......................................... 568 DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE. 570 Description ........................................................... 570 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 570 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 571 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 571 Overall Function Check ....................................... 572 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 573 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 574 Component Inspection ......................................... 577 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH ................... 579 Component Description ....................................... 579 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 579 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 579 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 580 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 581 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 582 Component Inspection ......................................... 585 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ............... 586 Component Description ....................................... 586 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 586 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 586 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 587 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 588 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 589 Component Inspection ......................................... 592 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION .................................. 593 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 593

DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................593 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................593 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH .........................594 Component Description .......................................594 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.594 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................594 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................595 Wiring Diagram ....................................................596 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................597 Component Inspection .........................................602 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .....................604 Component Description .......................................604 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.604 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................604 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................605 Wiring Diagram ....................................................606 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................607 Component Inspection ......................................... 611 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ........612 Component Description .......................................612 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................612 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................612 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................613 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ....614 Component Description .......................................614 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................614 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................614 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................615 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) .......................................616 Description ...........................................................616 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.616 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................616 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................616 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .617 Component Description .......................................617 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.617 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................617 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................617 Wiring Diagram ....................................................618 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................619 Component Inspection .........................................620 Removal and Installation ......................................621 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................622 Description ...........................................................622 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.622 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................622 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................622 Wiring Diagram ....................................................623 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................624 Component Inspection .........................................626 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ....................................................................627 Component Description .......................................627

Revision: 2005 November

EC-6

2006 Q45

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 627
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 627 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 627 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 629 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 630 Component Inspection ........................................ 632 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION ............................................................. 633 Description .......................................................... 633 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 633 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 633 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 634 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 635 Component Inspection ........................................ 639 Removal and Installation ..................................... 639 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ....... 640 Component Description ....................................... 640 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 640 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 640 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 641 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 642 Component Inspection ........................................ 643 Removal and Installation ..................................... 644 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ........................................................... 645 Component Description ....................................... 645 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 645 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 645 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 646 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ....................... 647 Component Description ....................................... 647 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 647 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 647 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 648 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 649 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 650 Component Inspection ........................................ 652 Removal and Installation ..................................... 653 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ....................... 654 Component Description ....................................... 654 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 654 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 654 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 655 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 656 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 657 Component Inspection ........................................ 660 Removal and Installation ..................................... 660 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ....................................... 661 Component Description ....................................... 661 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 661 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 661 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 662 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 663 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 664

Component Inspection ......................................... 667

Removal and Installation ..................................... 667 A

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR .................................... 668

Component Description ....................................... 668

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 668

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 668

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 669 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 670 C

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 671

Component Inspection ......................................... 675

Removal and Installation ..................................... 675 D

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ..................... 676

Component Description ....................................... 676

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 676

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 676

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 676 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 678 F

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 681

Removal and Installation ..................................... 686

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ........................................ 687 G

Component Description ....................................... 687

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 687 H Wiring Diagram .................................................... 688

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 689

Component Inspection ......................................... 693 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 695

Component Description ....................................... 695

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 695 J

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 696

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 697

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ............................... 698 K CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 698

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 699 L Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 701

FUEL INJECTOR ................................................... 706

Component Description ....................................... 706

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 706

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 707

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 710

Component Inspection ......................................... 714

Removal and Installation ..................................... 714

FUEL PUMP ........................................................... 715

Description ........................................................... 715

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 715

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 716

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 717

Component Inspection ......................................... 721

Removal and Installation ..................................... 721

ICC BRAKE SWITCH ............................................ 722

Component Description ....................................... 722

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 722

Revision: 2005 November

EC-7

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 723 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 724 Component Inspection ......................................... 730 IGNITION SIGNAL ................................................. 731 Component Description ....................................... 731 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 732 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 737 Component Inspection ......................................... 742 Removal and Installation ..................................... 743 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 744 Component Description ....................................... 744 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 745 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 746 Removal and Installation ..................................... 748 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS) ..................................................................... 749 Description ........................................................... 749 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 750 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 751

Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................753 Component Inspection .........................................756 Removal and Installation ......................................756 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR .....................757 Wiring Diagram ....................................................757 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...759 Fuel Pressure .......................................................759 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................759 Calculated Load Value .........................................759 Mass Air Flow Sensor ..........................................759 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................759 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ...................759 Fuel Temperature Sensor ....................................759 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ......................759 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ....................759 A/F Sensor 1 Heater ............................................759 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .........................760 Throttle Control Motor ..........................................760 Fuel Injector .........................................................760 Fuel Pump ............................................................760

Revision: 2005 November

EC-8

2006 Q45

INDEX FOR DTC

INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index

PFP:00024
A
NBS001PW

NOTE: q If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

q If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer

to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .

CONSULT-II GST*2

DTC*1

ECM*3

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

Reference page
D

U1000

1000*4

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

EC-156

U1001

1001*4

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

EC-156

U1010

1010

CONTROL UNIT(CAN)

EC-159

P0000

0000

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.

P0011 P0021

0011 0021

INT/V TIM CONT-B1 INT/V TIM CONT-B2

EC-161

P0031

0031

A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)

EC-173

P0032 P0037

0032 0037

A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1)

EC-173

EC-180

P0038 P0051

0038 0051

HO2S2 HTR (B1) A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)

EC-180

EC-173

P0052

0052

A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)

EC-173

P0057 P0058

0057 0058

HO2S2 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2)

EC-180

P0075 P0081

0075 0081

INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2

EC-188

P0101

0101

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-195

P0102 P0103

0102 0103

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-204
L
EC-204

P0112

0112

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-211

P0113

0113

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-211

P0117

0117

ECT SEN/CIRC

EC-215

P0118

0118

ECT SEN/CIRC

EC-215

P0122

0122

TP SEN2/CIRC

EC-221

P0123

0123

TP SEN2/CIRC

EC-221

P0125

0125

ECT SENSOR

EC-228

P0127

0127

IAT SENSOR

EC-231

P0128

0128

THERMSTAT FNCTN

EC-234

P0130

0130

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

EC-236

P0131

0131

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

EC-246

P0132

0132

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

EC-255

P0133

0133

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

EC-264

P0137

0137

HO2S2 (B1)

EC-276

P0138

0138

HO2S2 (B1)

EC-288

Revision: 2005 November

EC-9

2006 Q45

CONSULT-II GST*2 P0139 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P0157 P0158 P0159 P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 P0181 P0182 P0183 P0222 P0223 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0307 P0308 P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 P0335 P0340 P0420 P0430 P0441 P0442 P0443 P0444 P0445 P0447 P0448 P0452

DTC*1

ECM*3
0139 0150 0151 0152 0153 0157 0158 0159 0171 0172 0174 0175 0181 0182 0183 0222 0223 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0327 0328 0332 0333 0335 0340 0420 0430 0441 0442 0443 0444 0445 0447 0448 0452

Revision: 2005 November

INDEX FOR DTC
Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
HO2S2 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 FTT SENSOR FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT TP SEN 1/CIRC TP SEN 1/CIRC MULTI CYL MISFIRE CYL 1 MISFIRE CYL 2 MISFIRE CYL 3 MISFIRE CYL 4 MISFIRE CYL 5 MISFIRE CYL 6 MISFIRE CYL 7 MISFIRE CYL 8 MISFIRE KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EVAP SMALL LEAK PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V VENT CONTROL VALVE VENT CONTROL VALVE EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-10

Reference page
EC-304 EC-236 EC-246 EC-255 EC-264 EC-276 EC-288 EC-304 EC-316 EC-328 EC-316 EC-328 EC-339 EC-344 EC-344 EC-348 EC-348 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-365 EC-365 EC-365 EC-365 EC-370 EC-379 EC-386 EC-386 EC-391 EC-396 EC-404 EC-412 EC-412 EC-419 EC-430 EC-436
2006 Q45

CONSULT-II GST*2 P0453 P0455 P0456 P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 P0500 P0506 P0507 P0550 P0603 P0605 P0643 P0700 P0705 P0710 P0717 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0850 P1140 P1145 P1148 P1168 P1211 P1212 P1217 P1220 P1225 P1226 P1442 P1456 P1490 P1491

DTC*1

P1564

P1568

P1572

ECM*3
0453 0455 0456 0460 0461 0462 0463 0500 0506 0507 0550 0603 0605 0643 0700 0705 0710 0717 0720 0740 0744 0745 0850 1140 1145 1148 1168 1211 1212 1217 1220 1225 1226 1442 1456 1490 1491
1564
1568
1572

Revision: 2005 November

INDEX FOR DTC
Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP GROSS LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 ISC SYSTEM ISC SYSTEM PW ST P SEN/CIRC ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT ECM SENSOR POWER/CIRC TCM PNP SW/CIRC ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC TURBINE SENSOR VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC A/T TCC S/V FNCTN L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 CLOSED LOOP-B1 CLOSED LOOP-B2 TCS C/U FUNCTN TCS/CIRC ENG OVER TEMP FPCM/CIRCUIT CTP LEARNING CTP LEARNING EVAP SMALL LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK VC/V BYPASS/V VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
ASCD SW
ACC COMMAND VALUE*6
ASCD BRAKE SW
EC-11

Reference page

EC-443

EC-451

EC-459

EC-468

EC-470

EC-472

EC-474

EC-476

EC-478

EC-480

EC-485

EC-489

EC-492

AT-106

AT-107
H
AT-129

AT-111

AT-113

AT-120

AT-122
J
AT-124

EC-497

EC-502

EC-511
L
EC-511

EC-512

EC-513

EC-514

EC-534

EC-542

EC-544

EC-546

EC-554

EC-563

EC-570

EC-579 (Models with ICC) EC-586 (Models with ASCD)

EC-593

EC-594 (Models with ICC) EC-604 (Models with ASCD)

2006 Q45

INDEX FOR DTC

CONSULT-II GST*2

DTC*1

ECM*3

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

P1574

1574

ASCD VHL SPD SEN

P1610 - P1615

1610 - 1615

NATS MALFUNCTION

P1715

1715

IN PULY SPEED

P1730

1730

A/T INTERLOCK

P1752

1752

I/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1754

1754

I/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1757

1757

FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1759

1759

FR/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1762

1762

D/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1764

1764

D/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1767

1767

HLR/C SOL/CIRC

P1769

1769

HLR/C SOL FNCTN

P1772

1772

LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1774

1774

LC/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1800

1800

VIAS S/V CIRC

P1805

1805

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT

P2100

2100

ETC MOT PWR

P2101

2101

ETC FUNCTION/CIRC

P2103

2103

ETC MOT PWR

P2118

2118

ETC MOT

P2119

2119

ETC ACTR

P2122

2122

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2123

2123

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2127

2127

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2128

2128

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2135

2135

TP SENSOR

P2138

2138

APP SENSOR

P2A00

2A00

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

P2A03

2A03

A/F SENSOR1 (B2)

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *6: Models with ICC.

Reference page
EC-612 (Models with ICC) EC-614 (Models with ASCD)
EC-46 EC-616 AT-136 AT-141 AT-143 AT-145 AT-147 AT-149 AT-151 AT-153 AT-155 AT-157 AT-159 EC-617 EC-622 EC-627 EC-633 EC-627 EC-640 EC-645 EC-647 EC-647 EC-654 EC-654 EC-661 EC-668 EC-676 EC-676

Revision: 2005 November

EC-12

2006 Q45

INDEX FOR DTC

Alphabetical Index

NBS001PX

NOTE:

q If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC

U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

q If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer EC

to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/T INTERLOCK A/T TCC S/V FNCTN ACC COMMAND VALUE*6 APP SEN 1/CIRC APP SEN 1/CIRC APP SEN 2/CIRC APP SEN 2/CIRC APP SENSOR
ASCD BRAKE SW
ASCD SW
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN COMM CIRCUIT CKP SEN/CIRCUIT CLOSED LOOP-B1 CLOSED LOOP-B2 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 CONTROL UNIT(CAN)

CONSULT-II GST*2 P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P2A00 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A03 P1730 P0744 P1568 P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138

DTC*1

P1572

P1564

P1574
P0710 P1805 U1000 U1001 P0335 P1148 P1168 P0340 U1010

ECM*3
0031 0032 0051 0052 0130 0131 0132 0133 2A00 0150 0151 0152 0153 2A03 1730 0744 1568 2122 2123 2127 2128 2138
1572
1564
1574
0710 1805 1000*4 1001*4 0335 1148 1168 0340 1010

C
Reference page

EC-173

EC-236

EC-246

EC-255

EC-264
G
EC-676

EC-236

EC-246

EC-255

EC-264

EC-676

AT-136

AT-122

EC-593

EC-647

EC-654

EC-668

EC-594 (Models with ICC)

EC-604 (Models with ASCD)

EC-579 (Models with ICC) EC-586 (Models with ASCD)

EC-612 (Models with ICC) EC-614 (Models with ASCD)

AT-129

EC-622

EC-156

EC-370 EC-511 EC-511 EC-379 EC-159

Revision: 2005 November

EC-13

2006 Q45

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
CTP LEARNING CTP LEARNING CYL 1 MISFIRE CYL 2 MISFIRE CYL 3 MISFIRE CYL 4 MISFIRE CYL 5 MISFIRE CYL 6 MISFIRE CYL 7 MISFIRE CYL 8 MISFIRE D/C SOLENOID FNCTN D/C SOLENOID/CIRC ECM ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT ECT SEN/CIRC ECT SEN/CIRC ECT SENSOR ENG OVER TEMP ETC ACTR ETC FUNCTION/CIRC ETC MOT ETC MOT PWR ETC MOT PWR EVAP GROSS LEAK EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EVAP SMALL LEAK EVAP SMALL LEAK EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP VERY SML LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK FPCM/CIRCUIT FR/B SOLENOID FNCT FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SENSOR FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
Revision: 2005 November

INDEX FOR DTC

CONSULT-II GST*2 P1225 P1226 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0307 P0308 P1764 P1762 P0605 P0603 P0117 P0118 P0125 P1217 P2119 P2101 P2118 P2100 P2103 P0455 P0441 P0442 P1442 P0452 P0453 P0456 P1456 P1220 P1759 P1757 P0182 P0183 P0181 P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 P0171

DTC*1

EC-14

ECM*3
1225 1226 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 1764 1762 0605 0603 0117 0118 0125 1217 2119 2101 2118 2100 2103 0455 0441 0442 1442 0452 0453 0456 1456 1220 1759 1757 0182 0183 0181 0460 0461 0462 0463 0171

Reference page
EC-542 EC-544 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 EC-355 AT-151 AT-149 EC-489 EC-485 EC-215 EC-215 EC-228 EC-514 EC-645 EC-633 EC-640 EC-627 EC-627 EC-451 EC-391 EC-396 EC-546 EC-436 EC-443 EC-459 EC-554 EC-534 AT-147 AT-145 EC-344 EC-344 EC-339 EC-468 EC-470 EC-472 EC-472 EC-316
2006 Q45

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 HLR/C SOL/CIRC HLR/C SOL FNCTN HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2) I/C SOLENOID/CIRC I/C SOLENOID FNCTN IAT SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SENSOR IN PULY SPEED INT/V TIM CONT-B1 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 ISC SYSTEM ISC SYSTEM KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC LC/B SOLENOID FNCT LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MULTI CYL MISFIRE NATS MALFUNCTION
Revision: 2005 November

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1 CONSULT-II
GST*2 P0174 P0172 P0175 P1767 P1769 P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 P1752 P1754 P0112 P0113 P0127 P1715 P0011 P0021 P0075 P0081 P1140 P1145 P0506 P0507 P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 P0745 P1774 P1772 P0101 P0102 P0103 P0300 P1610 - P1615

ECM*3
0174 0172 0175 1767 1769 0137 0138 0139 0157 0158 0159 0037 0038 0057 0058 1752 1754 0112 0113 0127 1715 0011 0021 0075 0081 1140 1145 0506 0507 0327 0328 0332 0333 0745 1774 1772 0101 0102 0103 0300 1610 - 1615

EC-15

Reference page

EC-316

EC-328

AT-153

AT-155

EC-276

EC-288

EC-304

EC-276

EC-288

EC-304
F
EC-180

EC-180

AT-141
H
AT-143

EC-211

EC-231

EC-616

EC-161

EC-188

EC-502

EC-476

EC-478
M
EC-365

EC-365

AT-124

AT-159

AT-157

EC-195

EC-204

EC-355

EC-46

2006 Q45

INDEX FOR DTC

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

CONSULT-II GST*2

DTC*1

ECM*3

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.

P0000

0000

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT

P0850

0850

PNP SW/CIRC

P0705

0705

PURG VOLUME CONT/V

P0443

0443

PURG VOLUME CONT/V

P0444

0444

PURG VOLUME CONT/V

P0445

0445

PW ST P SEN/CIRC

P0550

0550

SENSOR POWER/CIRC

P0643

0643

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

P0740

0740

TCM

P0700

0700

TCS C/U FUNCTN

P1211

1211

TCS/CIRC

P1212

1212

THERMSTAT FNCTN

P0128

0128

TP SEN 1/CIRC

P0222

0222

TP SEN 1/CIRC

P0223

0223

TP SEN 2/CIRC

P0122

0122

TP SEN 2/CIRC

P0123

0123

TP SENSOR

P2135

2135

TURBINE SENSOR

P0717

0717

TW CATALYST SYS-B1

P0420

0420

TW CATALYST SYS-B2

P0430

0430

VC CUT/V BYPASS/V

P1491

1491

VC/V BYPASS/V

P1490

1490

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5

P0720

0720

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5

P0500

0500

VENT CONTROL VALVE

P0447

0447

VENT CONTROL VALVE

P0448

0448

VIAS S/V CIRC

P1800

1800

Reference page
--
EC-497 AT-107 EC-404 EC-412 EC-412 EC-480 EC-492 AT-120 AT-106 EC-512 EC-513 EC-234 EC-348 EC-348 EC-221 EC-221 EC-661 AT-111 EC-386 EC-386 EC-570 EC-563 AT-113 EC-474 EC-419 EC-430 EC-617

Revision: 2005 November

EC-16

2006 Q45

PRECAUTIONS

PFP:00001

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT A

BELT PRE-TENSIONER"

NBS001PY

The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along EC

with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain

types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS

system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.

Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-

ual.

WARNING:

q To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death

in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-

formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.

q Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-

sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air

Bag Module, see the SRS section.

q Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this

Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or

harness connectors.

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T

NBS001PZ

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the

driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.

CAUTION: q Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, I etc. will cause the MIL to light up.

q Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J dirt, bent terminals, etc.)

q Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-60, "HAR- K NESS CONNECTOR" .

q Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness

with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.

q Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube

may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,

etc. M
q Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and

TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Precaution

NBS001Q0

q Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
q Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
q Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF.
q Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable.

SEF289H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-17

2006 Q45

PRECAUTIONS
q Do not disassemble ECM. q If a battery terminal is disconnected, the memory will return
to the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. q If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. Diagnostic trouble codes 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values q When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.

PBIB1164E

SEC406D

q When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.

q Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs.

q Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc.

PBIB0090E

q Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

q Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-105, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" .

q Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.

q Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.

q Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.

q Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.

q Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents.

MEF040D

q Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS).

Revision: 2005 November

EC-18

2006 Q45

PRECAUTIONS
q After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
q When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor.
q Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
q B1 indicates the bank 1 and B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in the figure.

C
SEF217U
D

G H

SEF348N

PBIB1144E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-19

2006 Q45

PRECAUTIONS
q Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. q Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
q Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. q Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily. q Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
q When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location.
Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units.
Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller.
Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.

PBIB2462E SEF709Y SEF708Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-20

2006 Q45

PREPARATION

Special Service Tools
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name

Description

PFP:00002
A
NBS001Q2
EC

EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter

Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and

radiator filler neck

a: 28 (1.10) dia.

b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.

c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.

Unit: mm (in)

KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench

S-NT564

Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor 2

with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut

KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench
(J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit
KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box
KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter

S-NT379 S-NT636 LEC642 S-NT825

G
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio sensor 1 a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
H
I
Checking fuel pressure
J
K
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
L
M
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

S-NT826

Revision: 2005 November

EC-21

2006 Q45

Commercial Service Tools
Tool name (Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector i.e.: (J-41416)

PREPARATION
Description Locating the EVAP leak

NBS001Q3

EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (MLR-8382)

S-NT703

Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port

S-NT704

Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure

Socket wrench

S-NT815

Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor

Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12)
Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A907)

S-NT705 AEM488 S-NT779

Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below. a: J-43897-18 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: J-43897-12 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-22

2006 Q45

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram

PFP:23710
A
NBS001Q4
EC C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-23

PBIB3135E
2006 Q45

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

NBS001Q5

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*3 Piston position

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Throttle position sensor

Throttle position

Accelerator pedal position sensor Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Battery

Accelerator pedal position Gear position Battery voltage*3

Fuel injection & mixture ratio Fuel injector control

Knock sensor

Engine knocking condition

Power steering pressure sensor

Power steering operation

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

VDC/TCS operation command*2

Air conditioner switch

Air conditioner operation

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*2

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.

VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. <Fuel increase> q During warm-up q When starting the engine q During acceleration q Hot-engine operation q When selector lever is changed from N to D q High-load, high-speed operation <Fuel decrease> q During deceleration q During high engine speed operation

Revision: 2005 November

EC-24

2006 Q45

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A

PBIB3020E

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.

The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F

sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to

EC-236 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).

This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.

Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching F

characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated

oxygen sensor 2.

Open Loop Control

The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback

control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.

q Deceleration and acceleration

q High-load, high-speed operation

q Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit

q Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature

q High engine coolant temperature

q During warm-up

q After shifting from N to D

q When starting the engine

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL

The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally L designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is M then computed in terms of "injection pulse duration" to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. "Fuel trim" refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. "Short term fuel trim" is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. "Long term fuel trim" is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-25

2006 Q45

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION TIMING

Two types of systems are used.

PBIB0122E

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running.

Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all eight cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The eight fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.

FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.

Electronic Ignition (EI) System
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

NBS001Q6

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*2 Piston position

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor

Throttle position Accelerator pedal position

Ignition timing control

Power transistor

Battery

Battery voltage*2

Knock sensor

Engine knocking

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Gear position

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*1

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 2 The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
q At starting
q During warm-up
q At idle
q At low battery voltage

Revision: 2005 November

EC-26

2006 Q45

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

q During acceleration

The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed A within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. EC

Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed)
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

NBS001Q7

Actuator

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Neutral position

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

Engine coolant temperature sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine coolant temperature Engine speed

Fuel cut control

Fuel injector

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

If the engine speed is above 1,400 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is neutral and

engine speed is over 1,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.

Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.

NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-24 . H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-27

2006 Q45

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL Input/Output Signal Chart

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Air conditioner switch

Air conditioner ON signal

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine coolant temperature sensor
Battery

Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature Battery voltage*2

Air conditioner cut control

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Refrigerant pressure

Power steering pressure sensor

Power steering operation

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*1

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

System Description

This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. q When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. q When cranking the engine. q At high engine speeds. q When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. q When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. q When engine speed is excessively low. q When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

PFP:23710
NBS001Q8
Actuator
Air conditioner relay
NBS001Q9

Revision: 2005 November

EC-28

2006 Q45

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

PFP:18930
A
NBS001QA

Sensor ASCD brake switch

Input signal to ECM Brake pedal operation

ECM function

Actuator

Stop lamp switch

Brake pedal operation

ASCD steering switch

ASCD steering switch operation

Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

Gear position

ASCD vehicle speed control

Electric throttle control actuator

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*

TCM

Powertrain revolution*

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line

BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed F

without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/

h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).

ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.

Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE lamp and SET lamp in combination meter. If any malfunc-

tion occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.

NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

SET OPERATION

Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE lamp in combination meter illuminates.)

When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89

MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET lamp in combination meter illuminates.)

ACCELERATE OPERATION

If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until

the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.

And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

CANCEL OPERATION

When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.

q CANCEL switch is pressed

q More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)

q Brake pedal is depressed

q Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position

q Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed

q TCS system is operated

When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp.

q Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/ ACCELERATE switch.

q Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.

If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-29

2006 Q45

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions.
q Brake pedal is released q A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions
q Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)

Component Description
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-586 .

NBS001QB

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-604 and EC-687 .

STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-622 .

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-627 , EC-633 , EC-640 and EC-645 .

ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-695 .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-30

2006 Q45

CAN COMMUNICATION

CAN COMMUNICATION System Description

PFP:23710
A
NBS001QC

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-

tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other

control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2

communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.

Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

Refer to LAN-35, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-31

2006 Q45

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:14950
NBS001QD

SEF569XB
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-32

2006 Q45

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

: Vehicle front

: From next page

1. Intake manifold collector

2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP service port solenoid valve

NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
PBIB3136E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-33

2006 Q45

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-34

PBIB3137E
2006 Q45

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Pinch the fresh air hose. 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B .
Tightening Torque Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP canister and EVAP canister vent control valve.
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing.

2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.3 kPa (-0.061 to -0.034 kg/cm2 , - 0.87 to -0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
VACUUM CUT VALVE AND VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Refer to EC-568 .
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-411 .
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-343 .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-35

NBS001QE
A EC
C D
SEF396T
E F G H
SEF397T
I J K L
SEF445Y
M
SEF943S
2006 Q45

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAP SERVICE PORT Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.

How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
CAUTION: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: q Do not start engine. q Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-II 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. 2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select the "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT
MODE" with CONSULT-II. 5. Touch "START". A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.

SEF462UA NBS001QF

6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.

PEF838U

PEF917U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-36

2006 Q45

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPO-

RATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter.

C
SEF200U
D
E
F

G
SEF462UA
H 3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP canister vent control valve and vacuum cut
valve bypass valve to make a closed EVAP system. I

PBIB0026E

4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to

2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).

5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.

6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-37

2006 Q45

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description

PFP:00032
NBS001QG

SEF206VA
From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and refueling vapor line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same as conventional system.
WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
q Put a "CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE" sign in workshop.
q Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
q Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION: q Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Disconnect battery ground cable.
q Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
q Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
q Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
q After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
q Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-38

2006 Q45

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Diagnostic Procedure
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 6.

NBS001QH
A EC
C D E F

3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

SEF596U

>> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Replace water separator.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.

>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
7. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-39

2006 Q45

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 6.

3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

SEF596U

>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace water separator.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.

>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
7. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-40

2006 Q45

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
8. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
9. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
10. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
11. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
12. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. 2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. 3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
Component Inspection
WATER SEPARATOR 1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. 2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
SEF665U NBS001QI

Revision: 2005 November

EC-41

2006 Q45

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. NOTE: q Do not disassemble water separator.
PBIB1032E
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-8, "FUEL TANK" . 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container. c. Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-8, "FUEL TANK" . 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-42

PBIB1135E
2006 Q45

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into

the tank.

4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.

a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.

b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.

Always replace O-ring with new one.

c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge C retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

PBIB1135E

REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

1. Remove fuel filler cap.

2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.

Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.

3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.

4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable 3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage. L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-43

PBIB1135E
2006 Q45

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:11810
NBS001QJ

PBIB0062E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.

Component Inspection
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.

PBIB1588E NBS001QK

Revision: 2005 November

EC-44

PBIB1589E
2006 Q45

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.

A EC
C D
S-ET277
E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-45

2006 Q45

IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)

PFP:28591

Description

NBS001QL

q If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or "NATS MALFUNCTION" is displayed on "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-200, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)" .

q Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching "ERASE" in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II.

q When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system

and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be

SEF543X

carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)

initialization and all IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,

IVIS/NVIS.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-46

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction

PFP:00028
A
NBS002WA

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-

tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:

Emission-related diagnostic information

Diagnostic service

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Freeze Frame data

Service $03 of SAE J1979

Service $02 of SAE J1979

System Readiness Test (SRT) code

Service $01 of SAE J1979

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) 1st Trip Freeze Frame data

Service $07 of SAE J1979

Test values and Test limits Calibration ID

Service $06 of SAE J1979

Service $09 of SAE J1979

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.

×: Applicable --: Not applicable
F

DTC

1st trip DTC

Freeze Frame data

1st trip Freeze Frame data

SRT code

SRT status

Test value

CONSULT-II GST

ECM

×*

*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.

The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected

in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-90, "Fail-Safe Chart" .)

Two Trip Detection Logic

NBS002WB

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the J

ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>

If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in

the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd K trip> The "trip" in the "Two Trip Detection Logic" means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed

during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,

and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.

×: Applicable --: Not applicable L

MIL

DTC

1st trip DTC

Items

1st trip

Blinking

Lighting up

2nd trip

Blinking

Lighting up

1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip displaying displaying displaying

2nd trip display-
ing

Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) -- DTC: P0300 -

P0308 is being detected

Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) -- DTC: P0300 -

P0308 is being detected

One trip detection diagnoses

(Refer to EC-48, "EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-

MATION ITEMS" .)

Except above

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-47

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Emission-related Diagnostic Information
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Test value/ SRT code Test limit
(GST only)

NBS002WC

×:Applicable --: Not applicable

Trip

MIL

Reference page

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

U1000

1000*4

EC-156

CAN COMM CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT(CAN) NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. INT/V TIM CONT-B1 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2) INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SEN/CIRCUIT ECT SEN/CIRC ECT SEN/CIRC TP SEN 2/CIRC TP SEN 2/CIRC ECT SENSOR IAT SENSOR THERMSTAT FNCTN A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B1) HO2S2 (B1)

U1001

1001*4

U1010

1010

EC-156

EC-159

P0000

0000

Flashing*8

P0011

0011

P0021

0021

P0031

0031

P0032

0032

P0037

0037

P0038

0038

P0051

0051

P0052

0052

P0057

0057

P0058

0058

P0075

0075

P0081

0081

P0101

0101

P0102

0102

P0103

0103

P0112

0112

P0113

0113

P0117

0117

P0118

0118

P0122

0122

P0123

0123

P0125

0125

P0127

0127

P0128

0128

P0130

0130

P0131

0131

P0132

0132

P0133

0133

P0137

0137

EC-161

EC-173

EC-180

EC-173

EC-180

EC-188

EC-195

EC-204

EC-211

EC-215

EC-221

EC-228

EC-231

EC-234

EC-236

EC-246

EC-255

EC-264

EC-276

Revision: 2005 November

EC-48

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) A/F SENSOR1 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 FTT SENSOR FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT TP SEN 1/CIRC TP SEN 1/CIRC MULTI CYL MISFIRE CYL 1 MISFIRE CYL 2 MISFIRE CYL 3 MISFIRE CYL 4 MISFIRE CYL 5 MISFIRE CYL 6 MISFIRE CYL 7 MISFIRE CYL 8 MISFIRE KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EVAP SMALL LEAK PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V VENT CONTROL VALVE VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

P0138

0138

P0139

0139

P0150

0150

P0151

0151

P0152

0152

P0153

0153

P0157

0157

P0158

0158

P0159

0159

P0171

0171

P0172

0172

P0174

0174

P0175

0175

P0181

0181

P0182

0182

P0183

0183

P0222

0222

P0223

0223

P0300

0300

P0301

0301

P0302

0302

P0303

0303

P0304

0304

P0305

0305

P0306

0306

P0307

0307

P0308

0308

P0327

0327

P0328

0328

P0332

0332

P0333

0333

P0335

0335

P0340

0340

P0420

0420

P0430

0430

P0441

0441

P0442

0442

P0443

0443

P0444

0444

P0445

0445

P0447

0447

P0448

0448

Test value/

SRT code Test limit

Trip

(GST only)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-49

MIL

Reference A
page

EC-288 EC

EC-304

EC-236

EC-246

EC-255

EC-264

EC-276

EC-288

EC-304

EC-316

EC-328

EC-316

EC-328

EC-339

EC-344

EC-348

EC-355

EC-365

EC-370

EC-379

EC-386

EC-391

EC-396

EC-404

EC-412

EC-419

EC-430

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP GROSS LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 ISC SYSTEM ISC SYSTEM PW ST P SEN/CIRC ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT ECM SENSOR POWER/CIRC TCM PNP SW/CIRC ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC TURBINE SENSOR VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC A/T TCC S/V FNCTN L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 CLOSED LOOP-B1 CLOSED LOOP-B2 TCS C/U FUNCTN TCS/CIRC ENG OVER TEMP FPCM/CIRCUIT CTP LEARNING CTP LEARNING EVAP SMALL LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK VC/V BYPASS/V VC CUT/V BYPASS/V

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

P0452

0452

P0453

0453

P0455

0455

P0456

0456

P0460

0460

P0461

0461

P0462

0462

P0463

0463

P0500

0500

P0506

0506

P0507

0507

P0550

0550

P0603

0603

P0605

0605

P0643

0643

P0700

0700

P0705

0705

P0710

0710

P0717

0717

P0720

0720

P0740

0740

P0744

0744

P0745

0745

P0850

0850

P1140

1140

P1145

1145

P1148

1148

P1168

1168

P1211

1211

P1212

1212

P1217

1217

P1220

1220

P1225

1225

P1226

1226

P1442

1442

P1456

1456

P1490

1490

P1491

1491

Test value/ SRT code Test limit
(GST only)

×*7

Trip
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 or 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MIL
× × × × × × × × × × × -- × × or -- × × × × × × × × × × × × × × -- -- × × -- -- × × × ×

Reference page
EC-436 EC-443 EC-451 EC-459 EC-468 EC-470 EC-472 EC-472 EC-474 EC-476 EC-478 EC-480 EC-485 EC-489 EC-492 AT-106 AT-107 AT-129 AT-111 AT-113 AT-120 AT-122 AT-124 EC-497 EC-502 EC-502 EC-511 EC-511 EC-512 EC-513 EC-514 EC-534 EC-542 EC-544 EC-546 EC-554 EC-563 EC-570

Revision: 2005 November

EC-50

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Test value/

SRT code Test limit

Trip

(GST only)

ASCD SW

P1564

1564

ICC COMMAND VALUE*6

P1568

1568

ASCD BRAKE SW

P1572

1572

ASCD VHL SPD SEN

P1574

1574

NATS MALFUNCTION

P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615

IN PULY SPEED

P1715

1715

A/T INTERLOCK

P1730

1730

I/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1752

1752

I/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1754

1754

FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1757

1757

FR/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1759

1759

D/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1762

1762

D/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1764

1764

HLR/C SOL/CIRC

P1767

1767

HLR/C SOL FNCTN

P1769

1769

LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1772

1772

LC/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1774

1774

VIAS S/V CIRC

P1800

1800

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT

P1805

1805

ETC MOT PWR

P2100

2100

ETC FUNCTION/CIRC

P2101

2101

ETC MOT PWR

P2103

2103

ETC MOT

P2118

2118

ETC ACTR

P2119

2119

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2122

2122

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2123

2123

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2127

2127

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2128

2128

TP SENSOR

P2135

2135

APP SENSOR

P2138

2138

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

P2A00

2A00

A/F SENSOR1 (B2)

P2A03

2A03

Revision: 2005 November

EC-51

MIL

Reference A
page

EC-579 EC
(Models

with ICC) EC-586

(Models

with ASCD)

EC-593

EC-594

(Models

with ICC)

EC-604 (Models

with ASCD)

EC-612

(Models

with ICC) EC-614

(Models
with ASCD) G

EC-46

EC-616

AT-136

AT-141

AT-143

AT-145

AT-147

AT-149

AT-151

AT-153

AT-155

AT-157

AT-159

EC-617

EC-622

EC-627

EC-633

EC-627

EC-640

EC-645

EC-647

EC-654

EC-661

EC-668

EC-676

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *6: Models with ICC. *7: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *8: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-56, "How to Display SRT Status" .
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-48, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-83, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-II With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
q 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
q Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].

Revision: 2005 November

EC-52

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. A

PBIB0911E

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base

fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.

Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.

The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or F

GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For

details, see EC-118, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .

Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority

for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once

freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no

longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- H

lowing priorities to update the data.

Priority

Items

Freeze frame data

Misfire -- DTC: P0300 - P0308 Fuel Injection System Function -- DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175

Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd

trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated K

from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-

function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is

stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze

frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the

ECM memory.

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- M

ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-

SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating "INCMP", use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to "CMPLT". In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate "CMPLT" for each application system. Once set as "CMPLT", the SRT status remains "CMPLT" until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate "INCMP" for these items.
NOTE: The SRT will also indicate "INCMP" if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-53

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates "CMPLT" for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates "INCMP" for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates "CMPLT" for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT ("CMPLT") and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.

SRT Item The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to "CMPLT".

SRT item

Performance

(CONSULT-II indication)

Priority*

Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to "CMPLT"

Corresponding DTC No.

CATALYST

Three way catalyst function

P0420, P0430

EVAP SYSTEM

EVAP control system purge flow monitoring

P0441

EVAP control system

P0442, P1442

EVAP control system

P0456, P1456

HO2S

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

P0133, P0153

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0137, P0157

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0138, P0158

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0139, P0159

*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II.

SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as "CMPLT" after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below.

Self-diagnosis result

All OK

Case 1

Case 2

NG exists

Case 3

Diagnosis
P0400 P0402 P1402 SRT of EGR P0400 P0402 P1402 SRT of EGR P0400 P0402

P1402

(1st trip) DTC
SRT of EGR
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. --: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.

ON OFF OK (1) OK (1) OK (1)
"CMPLT" OK (1) -- (0) OK (1) "INCMP" OK --
NG
1st trip DTC
"INCMP"

Example

Ignition cycle ON OFF ON OFF ON

-- (1)

OK (2)

-- (2)

-- (1)

OK (2)

-- (2)

"CMPLT"

-- (1)

-- (0)

OK (1)

-- (1)

OK (2)

-- (2)

"INCMP"

"CMPLT"

(Consecutive

NG)

1st trip DTC

DTC (= MIL ON)

"INCMP"

"CMPLT"

When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate "CMPLT". Case 1 above

Revision: 2005 November

EC-54

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate

"CMPLT" at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. Case 2 above

If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-

cate "CMPLT". Case 3 above

The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as "INCMP" is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state

emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following

reasons:

q The SRT will indicate "CMPLT" at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.

q The emissions inspection requires "CMPLT" of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.

q When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to "CMPLT" of SRT, the self-diagno-

sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.

q If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate "INCMP".

NOTE: SRT can be set as "CMPLT" together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out

prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates "CMPLT".

SRT Service Procedure

If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating "INCMP", review

the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-55

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

*1 EC-52, "How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC"

PBIB2320E
*2 EC-56, "How to Display SRT Status" *3 EC-57, "How to Set SRT Code"

How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-II Selecting "SRT STATUS" in "DTC CONFIRMATION" mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a "CMPLT" is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, "INCMP" is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the figure. "INCMP" means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. "CMPLT" means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.

SEF935Z

Revision: 2005 November

EC-56

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

NOTE:

Though displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, "HO2S HTR" is not SRT item.

WITH GST

Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)

NO TOOLS

A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.

2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.

q When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.

q When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.

PBIB2317E

How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each

diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.

WITH CONSULT-II

Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table

on EC-54, "SRT Item" .

WITHOUT CONSULT-II

The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The

driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-57

2006 Q45

Driving Pattern

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-58

PBIB2906E
2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

q The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-

ing habits, etc.

Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the

shortest.

Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A.

*: Normal conditions refer to the following:

q Sea level

q Flat road

q Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)

q Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.

Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-

nosis may also be performed.

Pattern 1:

q The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of -10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)

(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).

q The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).

q The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage

between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).

Pattern 2:

q When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-

ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.

Pattern 3:

q Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.

q Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed

from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).

Pattern 4:

q The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-

state driving.

q If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.

K
PBIB2244E
L

Suggested Transmission Gear Position

Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-59

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY -- NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen.

Test value (GST display)

Item

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

Test limit

Conversion

TID

CID

CATALYST

Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)

P0420

01H

P0420

02H

81H

P0430

03H

02H

P0430

04H

82H

Max. Min. Max. Min.

1/128 1
1/128 1

EVAP control system (Small leak)

P0442

05H

03H

P1442

05H

03H

EVAP SYSTEM

EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441

06H

83H

P0456

07H

03H

EVAP control system (Very small leak)

P1456

07H

03H

Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.

1/128 mm2 1/128 mm2
20 mV 1/128 mm2 1/128 mm2

P0131

41H

8EH

Min.

5mV

P0132

42H

0EH

Max.

5mV

P2A00

43H

0EH

Max.

0.002

P2A00

44H

8EH

Min.

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1)

P0133

45H

8EH

Min.

0.002 0.004

P0130

46H

0EH

Max.

5mV

P0130

47H

8EH

Min.

5mV

P0133

48H

8EH

Min.

0.004

P0151

4CH

8FH

Min.

5mV

P0152

4DH

0FH

Max.

5mV

P2A03

4EH

0FH

Max.

0.002

P2A03

4FH

8FH

Min.

HO2S

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2)

P0153

50H

8FH

Min.

0.002 0.004

P0150

51H

0FH

Max.

5mV

P0150

52H

8FH

Min.

5mV

P0153

53H

8FH

Min.

0.004

P0139

19H

86H

Min.

10mV/500 ms

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)

P0137

1AH

86H

P0138

1BH

06H

Min. Max.

10 mV 10 mV

P0138

1CH

06H

Max.

10mV

P0159

21H

87H

Min.

10 mV/500 ms

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)

P0157

22H

87H

P0158

23H

07H

Min. Max.

10 mV 10 mV

P0158

24H

07H

Max.

10mV

Revision: 2005 November

EC-60

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Item
HO2S HEATER

Self-diagnostic test item A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)

DTC
P0032 P0031 P0052 P0051 P0038 P0037 P0058 P0057

Test value (GST display)

TID

CID

57H

10H

58H

90H

59H

11H

5AH

91H

2DH

0AH

2EH

8AH

2FH

0BH

30H

8BH

Test limit
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.

Conversion

5 mV

20 mV

HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION

How to Erase DTC

WITH CONSULT-II

The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting "ERASE" in the "SELF-

DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II.

If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-

ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).

NOTE:

If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10

seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch "A/T".

3. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". 4. Touch "ERASE". [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch "BACK" I
twice.

5. Touch "ENGINE".

6. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".

7. Touch "ERASE". (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-61

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

SCIA5671E
WITH GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).

No Tools NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) 3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . q If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours. q The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Diagnostic trouble codes 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes

Revision: 2005 November

EC-62

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all A of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-26, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-757, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.

EC NBS002WD C D E

SEF217U

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.

Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function

Explanation of Function

Mode

Status

Mode I

Ignition switch in BULB CHECK ON position

This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,

open circuit, etc.).

If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.

Engine stopped
I

Engine running

MALFUNCTION WARNING

Mode II

Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

ON position

RESULTS

This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip

detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver

that a malfunction has been detected.

The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in

the 1st trip.

q Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)

q One trip detection diagnoses

This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.

Engine stopped

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Revision: 2005 November

EC-63

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
MIL Flashing Without DTC When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-56, "How to Display SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: q It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. q It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction. q Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking. NOTE: Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this 10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For the details, refer to EC-56, "How to Display SRT Status" . 4. Fully release the accelerator pedal. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). NOTE: Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.

PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. 3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I -- BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI26, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-757, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I -- MALFUNCTION WARNING

MIL

Condition

When the malfunction is detected.

OFF

No malfunction.

This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II -- SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-64

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test

mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL A

illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are

displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.

PBIB3005E

A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The "zero" is indicated L

by the number of ten flashes. The "A" is indicated by the number of eleven flashes. The length of time the

1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)

cycle.

The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.

A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later

numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.

A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.

In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-

function. (See EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" )

How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC64, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . q If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. q Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-65

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

OBD System Operation Chart
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS

NBS002WE

q When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory.

q When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-47, "Two Trip Detection Logic" .

q The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset.

q The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The "TIME" in "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.

q The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.

SUMMARY CHART

Items

Fuel Injection System

Misfire

Other

MIL (goes off)

3 (pattern B)

DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display)

80 (pattern C)

40 (pattern A)

1st Trip DTC (clear)

1 (pattern C), *1

1 (pattern B)

1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear)

*1, *2

1 (pattern B)

For details about patterns B and C under "Fuel Injection System" and "Misfire", see EC-68, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR "MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM"" . For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-70, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR "MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM"" . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-66

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR "MISFIRE

" <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM"

*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up.

*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared.

*5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM.

SEF392S
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-67

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR "MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM" <Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
q The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
q The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
q The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in "OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART")
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: q When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F). q When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) q The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
q The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
q The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
q The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-68

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR

"MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM"

*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up.

*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared.

*5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.

SEF393SD
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-69

2006 Q45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR "MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM" <Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
q The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). q The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. q The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. <Driving Pattern B> Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. q The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. q The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. q The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).

Revision: 2005 November

EC-70

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection
1. INSPECTION START

PFP:00018
A
NBS001QR

1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for EC scheduled maintenance.

2. Open engine hood and check the following: C
Harness connectors for improper connections

Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut

Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections

Hoses and ducts for leaks

Air cleaner clogging

Gasket

3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.

Headlamp switch is OFF. Air conditioner switch is OFF.

SEF983U

Rear window defogger switch is OFF.

Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.

4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature

indicator points the middle of gauge.

Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3

J
SEF976U
K
L
M
SEF977U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-71

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

3. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76 .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

PBIA8513J

SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76 .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-72

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76 .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76 .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

SEF174Y

Check the Following.

q Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-379 .

q Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-370 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> 1. Repair or replace.

2. GO TO 4. L
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.)

2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .

>> GO TO 4.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-73

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle. 2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-76 .
12 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 11.

11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-76 .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76 .
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-74

PBIB2435E
SEF174Y
2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-76 . EC
12 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 19.

NG >> GO TO 16.

16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

PBIB2435E
E

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.

NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.

2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-379 .

q Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-370 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace.

2. GO TO 4.

18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but

this is a rare case.)

2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to

BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .

M >> GO TO 4.

19. INSPECTION END

Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure? Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" . 2. INSPECTION END
No >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-75

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. Method A 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing.
Method B 1. Remove ignition coil No. 1.

NBS001QS SEF058Y PBIB2436E

2. Connect ignition coil No. 1 and spark plug No. 1 with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-76

PBIB2424E
PBIB2437E
2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

3. Check ignition timing.

C
SEF166Y
D
E

G
PBIB2435E

VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION

NBS001QU

VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.

NOTE:

Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).

OPERATION PROCEDURE

With CONSULT-II

1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .

2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. K
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.

4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.

PBIB2242E

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION

NBS001QV

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.

OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-77

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION

NBS001QW

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.

OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.

Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION

NBS001QX

Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:

q Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.

q Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.

PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
q Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) q Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F) q PNP switch: ON
q Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
q Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
q Vehicle speed: Stopped
q Transmission: Warmed-up
With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9V.
Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.

OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-78

SEF217Z
2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. A

7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.

SEF454Y
D
E
F

ITEM

SPECIFICATION

Idle speed Ignition timing

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 12 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

G
MBIB0238E

Without CONSULT-II
H NOTE: q It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.

q It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit

has a malfunction.

1. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.

7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.

a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.

8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops

blinking and turned ON.

9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.

10. Start engine and let it idle.

11. Wait 20 seconds.

SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-79

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

ITEM

SPECIFICATION

Idle speed

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

Ignition timing

12 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. Erroneous idle.

Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

NBS001QY

Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.

SEF214Y

PBIB0041E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: q Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure. q Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because F50 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-80

2006 Q45

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting between fuel damper and fuel tube.
3. Connect the fuel pressure test gauge (quick connector adapter hose) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
Approximately 350 kPa At idling: (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. q Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging q Fuel filter for clogging q Fuel pump q Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.

A EC
C
PBIB2442E
D E F G
PBIB1243E
H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-81

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-83 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on EC-87 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.

PFP:00004
NBS001QZ
MEF036D
SEF233G
SEF234G

Revision: 2005 November

EC-82

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK FLOW

Overall Sequence

Revision: 2005 November

EC-83

PBIB2267E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Detailed Flow
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-86, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 . 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed. Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.) Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
.) Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-91 .) 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON). DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-84

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A

Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected

again.

At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on "DATA EC

MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)".

If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-88, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble

diagnosis order.

NOTE:

q Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.

q Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D

simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.

If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma-

tion Procedure.

Is DTC*1 detected?

Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check according to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
G Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.

Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.

7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

With CONSULT-II

Make sure that "MAS A/F SE-B1", "B/FUEL SCHDL", and "A/F

ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" are within the SP value using CON-

SULT-II "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode. Refer to EC-136, "Diag-

nostic Procedure" .

Are they within the SP value?

Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 8.

SEF601Z

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-91, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.

>> GO TO 10.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-85

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-129, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode" , EC-105, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" .

>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10. NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6. OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC58, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC. *2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples:
q Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
q Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.

SEF907L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-86

2006 Q45

Worksheet Sample

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
MTBL0017

Revision: 2005 November

EC-87

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

NBS002WF

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
NOTE: q If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .

Priority 1

Detected items (DTC) q U1000 U1001 CAN communication line q U1010 CAN communication q P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor q P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor q P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor q P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor q P0128 Thermostat function q P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor q P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor q P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) q P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) q P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor q P0500 Vehicle speed sensor q P0605 ECM q P0643 Sensor power supply q P0700 TCM q P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch q P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch q P1610 - P1615 NATS q P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

Revision: 2005 November

EC-88

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Priority

Detected items (DTC)

q P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater

q P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

q P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

q P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

q P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2

q P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring

q P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

q P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve

q P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor

q P0550 Power steering pressure sensor

q P0603 ECM power supply

q P0710 P0717 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772

P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches

q P1140 P1145 Intake valve timing control position sensor

q P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)

q P1220 Fuel pump control module

q P1490 P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

q P1805 Brake switch

q P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay

q P2101 Electric throttle control function

q P2118 Throttle control motor

q P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control

q P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function

q P0300 - P0308 Misfire

q P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function

q P0442 P0456 P1442 P1456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)

q P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)

q P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system

q P1148 P1168 Closed loop control

q P1211 TCS control unit

q P1212 TCS communication line

q P1564 ICC steering switch / ASCD steering switch

q P1568 ICC command value

q P1572 ICC brake switch / ASCD brake switch

q P1574 ICC vehicle speed sensor / ASCD vehicle speed sensor

q P1715 Turbine revolution sensor

q P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve

q P2119 Electric throttle control actuator

Revision: 2005 November

EC-89

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Fail-Safe Chart

NBS002WG

When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

DTC No. Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

P0102 P0103

Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

P0117 P0118

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

Condition

Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display)

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START

40°C (104°F)

More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START

80°C (176°F)

Except as shown above

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time)

When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running.

P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135

Throttle position sensor

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

P0643 Sensor power supply

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2100 P2103

Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2101

Electric throttle control function

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2118 Throttle control motor

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2119

Electric throttle control actuator

(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.

(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.

(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138

Accelerator pedal position sensor

q When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Revision: 2005 November

EC-90

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Matrix Chart
SYSTEM -- BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM

NBS001R2
A
EC

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

Reference

page

Warranty symptom code

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel

Fuel pump circuit

11232

EC-715, EC-534

Fuel pressure regulator system

334444444

EC-80

Fuel injector circuit

11232

Evaporative emission system

334444444

EC-706

EC-32

Air

Positive crankcase ventilation system

444

EC-44

Incorrect idle speed adjustment

1111

EC-71

Electric throttle control actuator

112332222

EC-633, EC-645

Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1

EC-71

Ignition circuit Main power supply and ground circuit

11222 22333

22 33

2 23

EC-731

EC-146

Mass air flow sensor circuit

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

EC-195, EC-204
L
EC-215, EC-228

A/F sensor 1 circuit

EC-236,

EC-246 ,

EC-255 ,

EC-264 ,

EC-676

Throttle position sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit

321

EC-221, EC-348 , EC-542 , EC-544 , EC-661
EC-492, EC-647 , EC-654 , EC-668

Knock sensor circuit

EC-365

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit

EC-370

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit

EC-379

Vehicle speed signal circuit

EC-474

Revision: 2005 November

EC-91

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM

Reference page

Warranty symptom code

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Power steering pressure sensor circuit

EC-480

ECM

22333333333

EC-485, EC-489

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit

13223

EC-188

PNP switch circuit

EC-497

Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit

EC-744

Electrical load signal circuit

EC-698

Air conditioner circuit

223333333

2 ATC-35

VIAS control solenoid valve circuit

EC-617

VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

BRC-10

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-92

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SYSTEM -- ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM

C
Reference page
D

Warranty symptom code

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel

Fuel tank

Fuel piping

5 555

Vapor lock
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane)

555

55 55

FL-8

FL-2

Air

Air duct

Air cleaner

EM-17

Air leakage from air duct

(Mass air flow sensor -- electric throttle control actuator)

Electric throttle control actuator

EM-17
J
EM-19

Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket

EM-19

Cranking

Battery Generator circuit Starter circuit

111

SC-4

SC-16

SC-9

Signal plate

EM-83

PNP switch

AT-107

Engine

Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket

55555

EM-67

Cylinder block

Piston

Piston ring Connecting rod

66666

EM-83

Bearing

Crankshaft

Valve mechanism

Timing chain Camshaft Intake valve timing control

55555

EM-39

EM-50

EM-39

Intake valve Exhaust valve

EM-67

Revision: 2005 November

EC-93

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM

Reference page

Warranty symptom code

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Exhaust

Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket
Three way catalyst

55555

EM-23, EX3

Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil

tion

filter/Oil gallery

55555

Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil

EM-26, LU-

10 , LU-9

LU-6

Cooling

Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap

CO-11, CO-14

Thermostat

CO-22

Water pump Water gallery

55555

CO-20 CO-6

Cooling fan

CO-18

Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant

CO-8

IVIS (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System -- NATS)

EC-46 or BL-200

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-94

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location

NBS001R3
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-95

PBIB3128E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Revision: 2005 November

EC-96

PBIB2412E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-97

PBIB2413E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Revision: 2005 November

EC-98

PBIB3132E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

F
PBIB2710E
G
H

PBIB3133E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-99

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Revision: 2005 November

EC-100

PBIB2415E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-101

PBIB2416E
2006 Q45

Vacuum Hose Drawing

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

NBS001R4

Refer to EC-23 for Vacuum Control System.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-102

PBIB1143E
2006 Q45

Circuit Diagram

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

NBS001R5
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-103

TBWM1214E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Revision: 2005 November

EC-104

TBWM1215E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout

NBS001R6
A

ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove glove box.
2. Remove ECM harness connector.

PBIB1192E

NBS001R7
E

3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
q Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
q Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

H
PBIB2431E
I
J
K

ECM INSPECTION TABLE

SEC406D

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

ECM ground

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Revision: 2005 November

EC-105

PBIB1584E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

Throttle control motor relay power supply

CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON]

4 L/W

Throttle control motor (Close)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully released

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V

5 L/B

Throttle control motor (Open)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0 - 14V

PBIB1104E

6 GY 10 P

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1)

0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

PBIB1105E

7 - 12V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

11 W/B

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

PBIB1790E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
7 - 12V

PBIB1790E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-106

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

12 R 13 P/L

Power steering pressure sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

[Engine is running] q Steering wheel: Being turned [Engine is running] q Steering wheel: Not being turned

0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

1.0 - 2.0V

EC
C
D
E
PBIB1041E
F

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
G

14 L/W
15 W 16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

PBIB1042E
H
I J
PBIB1039E
K L

Knock sensor (bank 1) A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

PBIB1040E
M
Approximately 2.5V
Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-107

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

21 W/B 22 Y 23 R/L 40 BR 41 G 42 B/R 44 BR 63 L

Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 Fuel injector No. 7 Fuel injector No. 8

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

PBIB0042E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

24 SB
25 G 28 LG 29 PU 32 G

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 5V

PBIB0043E

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)
Cooling fan relay-1 (Middle)
VIAS control solenoid valve EVAP control system pressure sensor

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met Engine: After warming up Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Not operating [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Middle speed or high speed operating [Engine is running] q Selector lever: P or N [Engine is running] q Selector lever: D q Engine speed: Below 5,000 rpm [Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 5,000 rpm
[Ignition switch: ON]

0 - 1.0V

PBIB1584E

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-108

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

34 L

Intake air temperature sensor

[Engine is running]

36 W 38 G/R 39 B/R

Knock sensor (bank 2)
Fuel pump control module (FPCM) check
Fuel pump control module (FPCM)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed [When cranking engine] [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [When cranking engine] [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

45 L/Y

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake EC
air temperature.
Approximately 2.5V
C
Approximately 0V

4 - 6V

0 - 0.5V
E
8 - 12V
F
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
G

11 - 14V

H
PBIB0050E
I

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than

100 seconds after starting engine)

46 L/R 60 GY/R 61 GY 62 Y/R 65 G/R 79 PU/W 80 W/R 81 W/G

Ignition signal No. 7 Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 8 Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

0 - 0.2V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

0.1 - 0.4V

PBIB0051E

M
PBIB0044E

47 L/W 48 R

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)
Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

PBIB0045E

Approximately 5V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-109

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

49 L

Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor)

50 B

Throttle position sensor 1

51 B/Y

Mass air flow sensor

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,500 rpm [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

53 W

Intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V More than 0.36V
Less than 4.75V 1.0 - 1.2V 1.6 - 1.9V 0 - 1.0V 0 - 1.0V

55 PU
57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY 66 R
67 B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)
Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)

PBIB2046E

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-110

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

68 L

Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

Less than 4.75V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released

69 W

Throttle position sensor 2

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

More than 0.36V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

70 P

Refrigerant pressure sensor

1.0 - 4.0V

q Both A/C switch and blower fan motor

switch: ON (Compressor operates)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

0 - 1.0V

q Idle speed

0 - 1.0V

72 W

Intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

73 Y/B 74 B
78 OR 82 L 83 L 84 Y/B

PBIB2046E

Engine coolant temperature sensor

[Engine is running]

Approximately 0 - 4.8V

Output voltage varies with

engine coolant temperature.

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle

for 1 minute under no load

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Electrical load signal (Headlamp switch)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Lighting switch: 2nd position [Ignition switch: ON] q Lighting switch: OFF

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-111

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

85 PU

Data link connector

86 P

CAN communication line

89 SB

Cooling fan relay -3(High)

90 R 91 B
93 L/R

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)
Electrical load signal (Rear window defogger switch)

94 L

CAN communication line

96 SB

Heater fan switch

97 L/OR

Cooling fan relay-2 (Low)

98 R

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

99 G/OR

ICC steering switch (models with ICC system)

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON] q CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Not operating [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: High speed operating
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Rear window defogger switch: ON [Ignition switch: ON] q Rear window defogger switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Engine is running] q Heater fan switch: ON [Engine is running] q Heater fan switch: OFF [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Not operating [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Low speed operating [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q ICC steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] q MAIN switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q SET/COAST switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q DISTANCE switch: Pressed

DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V Output voltage varies with the communication status. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V
Approximately 5V
Approximately 5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V Output voltage varies with the communication status. Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V
0.15 - 0.60V
1.95 - 2.40V
Approximately 4.3V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1.3V
Approximately 3.7V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2.2V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-112

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Ignition switch: ON] q ASCD steering switch: OFF

Approximately 4V

99 G/OR

[Ignition switch: ON] q MAIN switch: Pressed

ASCD steering switch

[Ignition switch: ON]

(models with ASCD system) q CANCEL switch: Pressed

Approximately 0V
C
Approximately 1V

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 3V

q RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 2V

q SET/COAST switch: Pressed

101 R/W

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF]

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

(11 - 14V)

102 GY/R 104 OR

PNP switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Selector lever: P or N [Ignition switch: ON] q Selector lever: Except above

[Ignition switch: OFF] Throttle control motor relay

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
H
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

0.5 - 1.0V

106 W

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

3.9 - 4.7V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

107 PU/W

Fuel tank temperature sensor

[Engine is running]

Approximately 0 - 4.8V

Output voltage varies with fuel

tank temperature.

[Ignition switch: ON] ICC brake switch (models

Approximately 0V

108 Y/PU

witch ICC system)

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

ASCD brake switch (models [Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

witch ASCD system)

q Brake pedal: Fully released

(11 - 14V)

109 W/G

Ignition switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

110 Y

Air conditioner switch

[Engine is running] q Both air conditioner switch and blower fan
motor switch: ON (Compressor operates)
[Engine is running] q Air conditioner switch: OFF

Approximately 0V Approximately 5V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-113

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

112 G/Y

Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

113 GY

Fuel pump relay

115 B 116 B
117 L/Y
119 R 120 R
121 W

ECM ground
EVAP canister vent control valve
Power supply for ECM
Power supply for ECM (Back-up)

CONDITION
[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
ON [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] q More than 5 seconds after turning ignition
switch ON [Engine is running] q Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: OFF]

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Body ground BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-114

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)
FUNCTION

NBS001R8
A

Diagnostic test mode

Function

Work support

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit.

Self-diagnostic results Data monitor

Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*
C
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.

Data monitor (SPEC)

Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read.

CAN diagnostic support monitor

The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.

Active test

Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range.

DTC & SRT confirmation

The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.

Function test ECM part number

This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.

ECM part number can be read.

*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

q Diagnostic trouble codes

q 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes

q Freeze frame data

q 1st trip freeze frame data

q System readiness test (SRT) codes

q Test values
I

Revision: 2005 November

EC-115

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

Item

WORK SUPPORT

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

DTC*1

FREEZE FRAME DATA*2

DATA MONITOR

DATA MONITOR (SPEC)

ACTIVE TEST

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION

SRT STATUS

DTC WORK SUPPORT

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Mass air flow sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

Heated oxygen sensor 2

Wheel sensor

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Throttle position sensor

Fuel tank temperature sensor

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS INPUT

EVAP control system pressure sensor

Intake air temperature sensor

Knock sensor

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal)

Air conditioner switch

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Stop lamp switch

Power steering pressure sensor

Battery voltage

Load signal

Intake valve timing control position sensor

Fuel level sensor ICC steering switch ASCD steering switch

ICC brake switch

ASCD brake switch

Revision: 2005 November

EC-116

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Item

WORK SUPPORT

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

A
DTC & SRT

RESULTS

DTC*1

FREEZE FRAME DATA*2

DATA MONITOR

DATA MONITOR (SPEC)

ACTIVE TEST

CONFIRMATION

SRT STATUS

DTC WORK SUPPORT

Fuel injector

Power transistor (Ignition timing)

Throttle control motor relay

Throttle control motor

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS OUTPUT

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

FPCM

×
E

Air conditioner relay

Fuel pump relay

Cooling fan relay

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

×*3
G
×*3

EVAP canister vent control valve

Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

VIAS control solenoid valve

Calculated load value

X: Applicable

*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.

*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data

mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-118 .

*3: Always "CMPLT" is displayed.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE Refer to GI-36, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" .
WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item
WORK ITEM

CONDITION

USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

q FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING "START" DUR- When releasing fuel pressure

ING IDLING.

from fuel line

CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.

IDLE AIR VOL LEARN

q THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM.

When learning the idle air volume

SELF-LEARNING CONT

q THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value FICIENT.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-117

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK ITEM

CONDITION

USAGE

EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE

OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.

When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system

q IGN SW ON

q ENGINE NOT RUNNING

q AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).

q NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM

q TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).

q WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE"

q WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.

NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY "BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY", EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.

VIN REGISTRATION

q IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM

When registering VIN in ECM

TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*

q IDLE CONDITION

When setting target idle speed

TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* q IDLE CONDITION

When adjusting target ignition timing

*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.

SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-48, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

Freeze frame data item*

Description

DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX]

q The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as "PXXXX". (Refer to EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)

FUEL SYS-B1 FUEL SYS-B2

q "Fuel injection system status" at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
q One mode in the following is displayed. Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop

CAL/LD VALUE [%] q The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F]

q The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]

q "Long-term fuel trim" at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
q The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim.

S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]

q "Short-term fuel trim" at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
q The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule.

ENGINE SPEED [rpm]

q The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-118

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Freeze frame data item*

Description

VEHICL SPEED [km/h] or [mph]

q The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

ABSOL TH·P/S [%] q The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

q The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]

q The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

D
×: Applicable E
Remarks
F

ENG SPEED [rpm]

q Accuracy becomes poor if engine

q Indicates the engine speed computed from

speed drops below the idle rpm.

the signals of the crankshaft position sensor

(POS) and camshaft position sensor

q If the signal is interrupted while the

(PHASE).

engine is running, an abnormal value

may be indicated.

MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]

q The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor q When the engine is stopped, a certain

is displayed.

value is indicated.

q "Base fuel schedule" indicates the fuel injec-

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior

to any learned on board correction.

A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]

q When the engine is stopped, a certain q The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback value is indicated.

correction factor per cycle is indicated. ×

q This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control.

COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F]

q When the engine coolant temperature

q The engine coolant temperature (determined sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM

by the signal voltage of the engine coolant

enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-

temperature sensor) is displayed.

ant temperature determined by the

ECM is displayed.

A/F SEN1 (B1) [V]

q The A/F signal computed from the input signal

A/F SEN1 (B2) [V]

of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed.

HO2S2 (B1) [V]

q The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-

HO2S2 (B2) [V]

sor 2 is displayed.

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN]

HO2S2 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN]

q Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH: Means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN: Means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large.

q When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.

VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph]

q The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal is displayed.

BATTERY VOLT [V]

q The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.

ACCEL SEN 1 [V]

ACCEL SEN 2 [V]

q ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by q The accelerator pedal position sensor signal

voltage is displayed.

ECM internally. Thus, it differs from

ECM terminal voltage signal.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-119

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]
THRTL SEN 1 [V] THRTL SEN 2 [V]
FUEL T/TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]
EVAP SYS PRES [V] FPCM DR VOLT [V] FUEL LEVEL SE [V]
START SIGNAL [ON/OFF]
CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF]
AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF]
P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF]
PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF]
LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF]
IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] INJ PULSE-B2 [msec] IGN TIMING [BTDC] CAL/LD VALUE [%]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS
× × ×
× ×
× ×
×
× ×
×
×
× × ×

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

Remarks

q The throttle position sensor signal voltage is q THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by

ECM internally. Thus, it differs from

displayed.

ECM terminal voltage signal.

q The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed.

q The intake air temperature (determined by the

signal voltage of the intake air temperature

sensor) is indicated.

q The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed.

q The voltage between fuel pump and FPCM is displayed.

q The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.

q Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com-

puted by the ECM according to the signals of q After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.

engine speed and battery voltage.

q Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by

ECM according to the accelerator pedal posi-

tion sensor signal.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-

tioner switch determined by the air conditioner

signal.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/ neutral position (PNP) switch signal.

q [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-

tem (determined by the signal voltage of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indi-

cated.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-

cal load signal.

ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/ or lighting switch is in 2nd position.

OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and

lighting switch are OFF.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch signal.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal.

q Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width q When the engine is stopped, a certain

compensated by ECM according to the input

signals.

computed value is indicated.

q Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals.

q When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.

q "Calculated load value" indicates the value of the current airflow divided by peak airflow.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-120

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]
MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

PURG VOL C/V [%]
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA] INT/V TIM (B2) [°CA] INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
INT/V SOL (B2) [%]

VIAS S/V [ON/OFF]
AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF]
FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF]
FPCM [HI/LOW]
VC/V BYPASS/V [ON/OFF]

VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF]
THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF]
COOLING FAN [HI/MID/LOW/OFF]

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

q Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor.
q Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals.
q The opening becomes larger as the value increases.

q Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle.

q The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated.

q The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases.

q The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.

q OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not operating. ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating.

q The air conditioner relay control condition

(determined by ECM according to the input

signals) is indicated.

q Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition

determined by ECM according to the input

signals.

q The control condition of the fuel pump control

module (FPCM) (determined by the ECM

according to the input signals) is indicated.

q The control condition of the vacuum cut valve bypass valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.

q ON: Open OFF: Closed

q The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.

q ON: Closed OFF: Open

q Indicates the throttle control motor relay con-

trol condition determined by the ECM accord-

ing to the input signals.

q The control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. HI: High speed operation MID: Middle speed operation LOW: Low speed operation OFF: Stop

Revision: 2005 November

EC-121

A
Remarks
EC C D E F G H I J K L M
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]
HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF]
I/P PULLY SPD [rpm]
VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [mph]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

IDL A/V LEARN [YET/CMPLT]

TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile]
A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%]
A/F S1 HTR (B2) [%]
AC PRESS SEN [V]
VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph]
SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph]
MAIN SW [ON/OFF]
CANCEL SW [ON/OFF]
RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF]
SET SW [ON/OFF]
BRAKE SW1 [ON/OFF]
BRAKE SW2 [ON/OFF]
DIST SW [ON/OFF]

VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT]

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals.
q Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal.
q Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the revolution sensor signal.
q Display the condition of idle air volume learning. YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already been performed successfully.
q Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
q Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals.
q The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases.
q The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed.
q The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed.
q The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ ACCELERATE switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/ COAST switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from DISTANCE switch signal.
q Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-122

Remarks
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

A
Remarks

q Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.

NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the

LO SPEED CUT

ASCD set speed.

[NON/CUT]

CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively

low compared with the ASCD set speed, and

ASCD operation is cut off.

AT OD MONITOR

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D

[ON/OFF]

according to the input signal from the TCM.

AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE

CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF]

lamp determined by the ECM according to the

input signals.

SET LAMP [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input

signals.

Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%]
DUTY-HI
DUTY-LOW
PLS WIDTH-HI

q Only "#" is displayed if item is unable to

be measured.

q Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width q Figures with "#"s are temporary ones.

measured by the probe.

They are the same figures as an actual

piece of data which was just previously

measured.

PLS WIDTH-LOW

NOTE:

Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

K
Remarks
L

q Indicates the engine speed computed

ENG SPEED [rpm]

from the signals of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position

sensor (PHASE).

MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]

q The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed.

q When engine is running specification range is indicated.

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

q "Base fuel schedule" indicates the fuel

injection pulse width programmed into q When engine is running specification ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.

rection.

A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]

q When engine is running specification

q The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.

back correction factor per cycle is indi-

cated.

q This data also includes the data for the

air-fuel ratio learning control.

NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-123

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item

TEST ITEM

CONDITION

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

FUEL INJECTION

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
q Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Harness and connectors q Fuel injector q Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

IGNITION TIMING

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
q Timing light: Set
q Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.

POWER BALANCE

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine.
q A/C switch: OFF q Selector lever: P or N q Cut off each fuel injector signal
one at a time using CONSULT-II.

Engine runs rough or dies.

q Harness and connectors q Compression q Fuel injector q Power transistor q Spark plug q Ignition coil

COOLING FAN*1 *2

q Ignition switch: ON
q Turn the cooling fan "HI", "MID", "LOW" and "OFF" using CONSULT-II.

Cooling fan moves and stops.

q Harness and connectors q Cooling fan motor q Cooling fan relay

ENG COOLANT TEMP

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
q Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Harness and connectors q Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor q Fuel injector

FUEL PUMP RELAY

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Turn the fuel pump relay "ON" and "OFF" using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.

Fuel pump relay makes the operat- q Harness and connectors

ing sound.

q Fuel pump relay

q Ignition switch: ON
VIAS SOL VALVE q Turn solenoid valve "ON" and "OFF" with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound.

Solenoid valve makes an operating q Harness and connectors

sound.

q Solenoid valve

PURG VOL CONT/V

q Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm.
q Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II.

Engine speed changes according to the opening percent.

q Harness and connectors q Solenoid valve

FUEL/T TEMP SEN

q Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.

VENT CONTROL/V

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Turn solenoid valve "ON" and "OFF" with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.

Solenoid valve makes an operating q Harness and connectors

sound.

q Solenoid valve

FPCM

q Engine: Returns to the original trouble condition
q Select "LOW" and "HI" with CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Harness and connectors q FPCM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-124

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TEST ITEM

CONDITION q Ignition switch: ON

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
A

VC/V BYPASS/V

(Engine stopped)
q Turn solenoid valve "ON" and "OFF" with the CONSULT-II and

Solenoid valve makes an operating q Harness and connectors

sound.

q Solenoid valve

listen to operating sound.

q Engine: Return to the original

V/T ASSIGN

trouble condition

q Harness and connectors If trouble symptom disappears, see

ANGLE

q Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.

q Intake valve timing control sole-

CONSULT-II.

noid valve

*1: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

*2: Never change cooling fan speed from "LOW" to "HI" or from "HI" to "LOW" directory. Change the speed through "MID" to prevent

cooling fan motor from damage.

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode

For details, refer to EC-53, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . F
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode

This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.

DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode

Test mode

Test item

EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442

EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456

A/F SEN1 HO2S2

PURG VOL CN/V P1444 PURG FLOW P0441 VC CUT/V BP/V P1491 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 HO2S2 (B2) P0159

Corresponding DTC No.

Reference page

P0442 P0447

EC-396

EC-419

P0455 P1442

EC-451

EC-546

P0456

EC-459

P1456 P0443

EC-554
J
EC-404

P0441

EC-391

P1491

EC-570

P0133

EC-264

P0130 P0153

EC-236
L
EC-264

P0150

EC-236

P0138 P0137

EC-288

EC-276

P0139

EC-304

P0158

EC-288

P0157

EC-276

P0159

EC-304

REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching "SETTING" in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-125

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

1. "AUTO TRIG" (Automatic trigger):
q The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, "MONITOR" in "DATA MONITOR" screen is changed to "Recording Data... xx%" as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, "REAL-TIME DIAG" screen is displayed. If "STOP" is touched on the screen during "Recording Data... xx%", "REAL-TIME DIAG" screen is also displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by "TRIGGER POINT" and "Recording Speed". Refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
2. "MANU TRIG" (Manual trigger):
q DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected.

PBIB1593E

SEF707X
Operation 1. "AUTO TRIG"
q While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to "DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)" mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected.
q While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in "DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)" mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to "Incident Simulation Tests" in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. "MANU TRIG"
q If the malfunction is displayed as soon as "DATA MONITOR" is selected, reset CONSULT-II to "MANU TRIG". By selecting "MANU TRIG" you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-126

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name "GST" or "Generic Scan Tool" is used in this service manual.

H
PBIB0197E
I
NBS001R9
J
K
L

FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Service $01 READINESS TESTS
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA)
Service $03 DTCs

SEF139P

Function
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-127

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Diagnostic test mode Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS) Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS)

Service $08

Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)

Function
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: q Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) q Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03) q Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01) q Clear freeze frame data (Service $02) q Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) q Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed. q EVAP canister vent control valve: closed q Vacuum cut valve bypass valve: open In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function. q Low ambient temperature q Low battery voltage q Engine running q Ignition switch OFF q Low fuel temperature q Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-128

PBIB0196E
SEF398S
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service pro-

cedure.

For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the

tool maker.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF416S
D
NBS001RA

Remarks:

q Specification data are reference values.

q Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.

* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.

i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in

spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM

according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ENG SPEED

q Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.

Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication.

MAS A/F SE-B1

See EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .

B/FUEL SCHDL

See EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .

A/F ALPHA-B1 A/F ALPHA-B2

See EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .

COOLAN TEMP/S q Engine: After warming up

More than 70°C (158°F)

A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5 V

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions

HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)

are met. Engine: After warming up

J
0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at

idle for 1 minute under no load

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions

are met.

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

Engine: After warming up

LEAN RICH

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at

idle for 1 minute under no load

VHCL SPEED SE

q Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indi- Almost the same speed as

cation.

speedometer indication

BATTERY VOLT q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

11 - 14V

ACCEL SEN 1

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.8V

ACCEL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.3 - 1.2V 3.9 - 4.8V

THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Selector lever: D

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

EVAP SYS PRES q Ignition switch: ON

Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

START SIGNAL

q Ignition switch: ON START ON

OFF ON OFF

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

Revision: 2005 November

EC-129

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL
LOAD SIGNAL IGNITION SW HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2
IGN TIMING
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
PURG VOL C/V
INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2)

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Air conditioner switch: OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.)

OFF ON

q Ignition switch: ON

Selector lever: P or N Selector lever: Except above

ON OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Steering wheel: Not being turned (Forward direction)
Steering wheel: Being turned

OFF ON

q Ignition switch: ON

Rear window defogger switch: ON

and/or

Lighting switch: 2nd position

Rear window defogger switch and lighting switch: OFF

OFF

q Ignition switch: ON OFF ON

ON OFF ON

q Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON

engine

Heater fan switch: OFF

ON OFF

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

2.0 - 3.0 msec

q Selector lever: P or N

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

2,000 rpm

1.9 - 2.9 msec

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

7° - 17° BTDC 25° - 45° BTDC

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

15% - 35%

q Selector lever: P or N

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

2,500 rpm

10% - 35%

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

3.8 - 5.2 g·m/s

q Selector lever: P or N

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

2,500 rpm

16.0 - 21.5 g·m/s

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Selector lever: P or N

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

2,000 rpm

q No load

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Selector lever: P or N

-5° - 5°CA

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

2,000 rpm

Approx. 0° - 20°CA

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

0% - 2%

q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

2,000 rpm

Approx. 25% - 50%

Revision: 2005 November

EC-130

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V

CONDITION q Selector lever: P or N q Engine speed: More than 5,000 rpm q Selector lever: Except P or N q Engine speed: Less than 5,000 rpm

SPECIFICATION
A
ON

OFF

Air conditioner switch: OFF

OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle the

AIR COND RLY

engine

Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates)

FUEL PUMP RLY

q For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON q Engine running or cranking

q Except above

OFF

q Engine: Cranking

FPCM

q Engine: Idle q Engine coolant temperature: More than 10°C (50°F)

LOW

VC/V BYPASS/V q Ignition switch: ON

OFF

VENT CONT/V

q Ignition switch: ON

OFF

THRTL RELAY

q Ignition switch: ON

Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less

OFF

Engine coolant temperature is between q Engine: After warming up, idle the 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)

LOW

COOLING FAN

engine

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

Engine coolant temperature is between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)

MID

Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more

q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

Engine: After warming up

J
ON

HO2S2 HTR (B2) Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at

idle for 1 minute under no load

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

OFF

I/P PULLY SPD

q Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)

Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication

VEHICLE SPEED

q Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indi- Almost the same speed as

cation.

the speedometer indication

TRVL AFTER MIL q Ignition switch: ON

Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned 0 - 65,535 km

ON.

(0 - 40,723 miles)

A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

0 - 100%

AC PRESS SEN

q Engine: Idle 1.0 - 4.0V
q Both air conditioner switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)

VHCL SPEED SE

q Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indi- Almost the same speed as

cation.

the speedometer indication

SET VHCL SPD

q Engine: Running

ASCD: Operating

The preset vehicle speed is displayed

MAIN SW

q Ignition switch: ON

MAIN switch: Pressed MAIN switch: Released

ON OFF

CANCEL SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CANCEL switch: Pressed CANCEL switch: Released

ON OFF

Revision: 2005 November

EC-131

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

RESUME/ACC SW q Ignition switch: ON

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released

ON OFF

SET SW

q Ignition switch: ON

SET/COAST switch: Pressed SET/COAST switch: Released

ON OFF

BRAKE SW1 (ICC/ASCD brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

BRAKE SW2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

DIST SW

q Ignition switch: ON

DISTANCE switch: Pressed DISTANCE switch: Released

ON OFF

CRUISE LAMP

q Ignition switch: ON

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time at the 2nd time

ON OFF

q MAIN switch: ON

ASCD: Operating

SET LAMP

q When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH)

ASCD: Not operating

OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-132

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

NBS002WH
A

CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1

Below is the data for "CLSD THL POS", "ACCEL SEN 1" and "THRTL SEN 1" when depressing the accelera- EC

tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position.

The signal of "ACCEL SEN 1" and "THRTL SEN 1" should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise

after "CLSD THL POS" is changed from "ON" to "OFF".

F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 Below is the data for "ENG SPEED", "MAS A/F SE-B1", "THRTL SEN 1", "HO2S2 (B1)" and "INJ PULSE-B1" G when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H

M
PBIB2445E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-133

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Revision: 2005 November

EC-134

PBIB2099E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description

PFP:00031
A
NBS002WI

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in "DATA MONI- EC TOR (SPEC)" mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:

q B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D rection)

q A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)

q MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)

Testing Condition

NBS002WJ

q Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

q Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)

q Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)

q Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)

q Transmission: Warmed-up*1

q Electrical load: Not applied*2

q Engine speed: Idle

*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" (A/T

fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).

*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight

ahead.

Inspection Procedure

J
NBS002WK

NOTE:

Perform "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode in maximum scale display.

1. Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.

3. Select "B/FUEL SCHDL", "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"

and "MAS A/F SE-B1" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode with

CONSULT-II.

4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.

5. If NG, go to EC-136, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF601Z

Revision: 2005 November

EC-135

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure
OVERALL SEQUENCE

NBS002WL

Revision: 2005 November

EC-136

PBIB2268E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-137

PBIB2548E
2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"
1. Start engine. 2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-135, "Testing Condition" . 3. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. NOTE: Check "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
2. CHECK "B/FUEL SCHDL"
Select "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19.

PBIB2369E

3. CHECK "B/FUEL SCHDL"
Select "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.

PBIB2332E

4. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"

PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. 3. Start engine. 4. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-138

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL A

1. Stop the engine.

2. Change engine oil.

NOTE:

This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving

conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too

short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C

dition.

>> INSPECTION END

6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-80, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9. NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE F
CHECK" . GO TO 8. NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

1. Check the following. H
Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube

Clogged fuel filter

Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-715, "FUEL PUMP" .)

2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)

If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

J >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"

1. Start engine.

2. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the

each indication is within the SP value.

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END

NG >> GO TO 9.

9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

1. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10.

PBIB0133E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-139

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Check the following. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-731, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .) Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .) Intake air leakage Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-67, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .) 2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"
1. Start engine. 2. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1. q For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-236, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . q For DTC P0131, P0151, refer to EC-246, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . q For DTC P0132, P0152, refer to EC-255, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . q For DTC P0133, P0153, refer to EC-265, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . q For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-676, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"
1. Start engine. 2. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-140

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

16. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" A

1. Start engine.

2. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the

each indication is within the SP value.

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END

NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-91, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .

17. CHECK "B/FUEL SCHDL"

Select "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and

make sure that the indication is within the SP value.

OK or NG E
OK >> INSPECTION END NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
F

18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. Engine oil level is too high Engine oil viscosity Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive Noise from engine Noise from transmission, etc. 2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. Valve clearance malfunction Intake valve timing control function malfunction Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. q Crushed air ducts q Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element q Uneven dirt of air cleaner element q Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.

G
PBIB2332E
H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-141

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
20. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2", AND "B/FUEL SCHDL"
Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2", and "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG ("B/FUEL SCHDL" is more, "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
22. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"
1. Start engine. 2. Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
2. GO TO 29. NG >> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK "MAS A/F SE-B1"
Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.

24. REPLACE ECM

PBIB2370E

1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS(NATS) system and registration of all IVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . 3. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" . 4. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> GO TO 29.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-142

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A

Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.

q Crushed air ducts

q Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element

q Uneven dirt of air cleaner element

q Improper specification of intake air system C
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 27.

NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.

26. CHECK "B/FUEL SCHDL"

Select "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the indication is within the E SP value.

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END

NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.

27. CHECK "MAS A/F SE-B1" G

Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 28.

NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and

then GO TO 30.

28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

PBIB2370E
K

Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.

q Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct

q Looseness of oil filler cap

q Disconnection of oil level gauge

q Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve

q Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

q Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket

q Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts

q Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.

>> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2", AND "B/FUEL SCHDL"

Select "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2", and "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-91, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-143

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
30. CHECK "B/FUEL SCHDL"
Select "B/FUEL SCHDL" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode, and then make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-91, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-144

2006 Q45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description

PFP:00006
A
NBS001RG

Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function

returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent

incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident

occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may

not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.

Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow

Situation

The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].

3 or 4

The symptom described by the customer does not recur.

(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.

The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS001RH

Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G TION" .

>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.

Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Repair or replace.

3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "INCIDENT SIMULATION

TESTS".

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS

Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , "HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS", "How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal".
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-145

2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram

PFP:24110
NBS001RI

Revision: 2005 November

EC-146

TBWM1216E
2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

109 W/G

Ignition switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-147

2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Revision: 2005 November

EC-148

TBWM0529E
2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

ECM ground

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

115 B 116 B

ECM ground

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS001RJ
E

Start engine.

Is engine running?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 12.
No >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E32, F32 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connectors M143, E215 q 15A fuse q Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

K
MBIB0015E
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-149

2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F32, E32 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-150

2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A 1. Disconnect ECM relay.
EC

2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.

D
PBIB0040E
E
F
G

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 10A fuse q 20A fuse q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connector E215 q Fuse, fusible link and relay block (J/B) connector E3 q Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and ECM relay terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connector M143 q Harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-151

PBIB0071E

2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
11. CHECK ECM RELAY
Refer to EC-155, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-731, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> Replace ECM relay.
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 13. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 15.
13. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Disconnect ECM relay.

PBIB1630E

2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-152

PBIB0040E
PBIB0074E
2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check harness for open or short between ECM relay and 10A fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

15. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

C 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ECM relay terminal 6.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16.
F
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connector M143

q Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I
17. CHECK ECM RELAY

Refer to EC-155, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> Replace ECM relay.

18. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-153

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

19. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> GO TO 20.
20. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F32, E32 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Ground Inspection

NBS001RK

Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
q Remove the ground bolt or screw.
q Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
q Clean as required to assure good contact.
q Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
q Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
q If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-154

2006 Q45

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-15, "Ground Distribution" .

Component Inspection
ECM RELAY 1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.

Condition 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 OFF
3. If NG, replace ECM relay.

Continuity Yes No

A EC
C D E F
PBIB1870E
G
NBS001RL
H I J
PBIB0077E
K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-155

2006 Q45

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

PFP:23710

Description

NBS001RM

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001RN

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

U1000*1 1000*1
U1001*2 1001*2

CAN communication line

q ECM cannot communicate to other control units. q Harness or connectors

q ECM cannot communicate for more than the

(CAN communication line is open or

specified time.

shorted)

*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

DTC Confirmation Procedure
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NBS001RO

Revision: 2005 November

EC-156

2006 Q45

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Wiring Diagram

NBS001RP
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-157

TBWT0698E
2006 Q45

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to LAN-17, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .

NBS001RQ

Revision: 2005 November

EC-158

2006 Q45

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION Description

PFP:23710
A
NBS002WM

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-

control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2

communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.

Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002WN

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No.
U1010 1010

Trouble diagnosis name CAN communication bus

DTC detecting condition
Initializing CAN communication bus is malfunctioning.

DTC Confirmation Procedure
WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

q ECM

Possible cause

E
NBS002WO
F
G

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

I
SEF058Y
J
K

Revision: 2005 November

EC-159

2006 Q45

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS002WP

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select Service $04 with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 4. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END
2. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . 3. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" . 4. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-160

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL Description

PFP:23796
A
NBS001RR

If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075, P0081, P1140 or P1145, first perform the trouble diagnosis for EC-188, "DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" or EC-502, "DTC P1140, EC P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR" .

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor

Input signal to ECM function

ECM

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Intake valve timing control position sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine speed
Intake valve timing signal Engine coolant temperature

Intake valve

Intake valve timing control

timing control solenoid valve

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

PBIB1102E

This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake

valve.

The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant

temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-

noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake

valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
Intake Valve Timing (IVT) control solenoid valve is activated by ON/ OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The IVT control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position.

PBIB1842E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-161

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor Intake valve timing control position sensors are located in the front of cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC. The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2)

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2)

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic

SEF359Z NBS001RS
SPECIFICATION -5° - 5°CA Approx. 0° - 20°CA 0% - 2% Approx. 25% - 50%
NBS001RT

DTC No.
P0011 0011 (Bank 1)

Trouble diagnosis name

P0021 0021 (Bank 2)

Intake valve timing control performance

Detecting condition

The alignment of the intake valve timing control has been misresistered.

There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
q Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
q Intake valve timing control position sensor
q Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
q Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
q Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft sprocket
q Timing chain installation
q Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve timing control

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Intake valve timing control

The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function

Revision: 2005 November

EC-162

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed.

NBS001RU
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at C idle.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. E
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED

More than 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

Selector lever

1st or 2nd position

Driving location uphill

Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.)

4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.

PBIB0164E

ENG SPEED

Idle

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

Selector lever

P or N position

5. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST

Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-

onds.

ENG SPEED

1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S

70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)

Selector lever

1st or 2nd position

Driving location uphill

Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.)

4. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.

PBIB0164E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-163

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

NBS001RV

Revision: 2005 November

EC-164

TBWM1217E
2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
D

7 - 12V

10 P

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed: 2,000rpm
F

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

0 - 1.0V

PBIB1790E
G

0 - 1.0V

72 W

Intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF]
q For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF

0 - 1.5V

PBIB2046E

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-165

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

Revision: 2005 November

EC-166

TBWM1218E
2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
D

7 - 12V

11 W/B

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed: 2,000rpm
F

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

0 - 1.0V

PBIB1790E
G

0 - 1.0V

53 W

Intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF]
q For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF

0 - 1.5V

PBIB2046E

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

NBS001RW

1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. KG >> Go to LU-6, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-167

PBIA8559J
2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between intake valve timing control position sen-
sor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB2422E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ECM q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ECM relay

SEF509Y

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-168

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between intake valve timing control position sensor terminal 1 and ground. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. C
3. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors F32, E32

q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. G
7. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

AND SHORT H
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between the following;

ECM terminal 72 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1) terminal 2 or

ECM terminal 53 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2) terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-171, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace intake valve timing control position sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-169

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
9. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.

PBIB2422E

10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM relay.

PBIB0192E

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between the following;
ECM terminal 10 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) terminal 1 or ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-171, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-170

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

13. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 14.

NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

14. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-385, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 15.

NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

15. CHECK CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Check accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft sprocket. Refer to EM-50, "CAM-

SHAFT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal pick-up cutout of camshaft sprocket.

16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.

Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?

Yes or No

Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .

No >> GO TO 17.

17. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-56, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> Clean lubrication line.

18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor.

M
NBS001RX

Revision: 2005 November

EC-171

2006 Q45

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

5. Check resistance as shown below.

Terminal No. (Polarity)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

3 (+) - 1 (-)

2 (+) - 1 (-)

Except 0 or

3 (+) - 2 (-)

6. If NG, replace intake valve timing control position sensor.

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.

Terminals 1 and 2
1 or 2 and ground

Resistance
7.0 - 7.5 [at 20°C (68°F)]
(Continuity should not exist)

If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed.
Removal and Installation
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-172

SEF362Z PBIB0194E
PBIB0193E PBIB2275E
NBS001RY
2006 Q45

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:22693
A
NBS002WQ

Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Mass air flow sensor

Input Signal to ECM Engine speed Amount of intake air

ECM function

Actuator

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

heater control

heater

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating

condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

D
NBS002WR

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

On Board Diagnosis Logic

0 - 100%

F
NBS002WS

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0031

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause
G

0031 (Bank 1)
P0051 0051

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low

The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the A/F sensor 1 heater.)

q Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.)
q A/F sensor 1 heater

(Bank 2)

P0032

0032 (Bank 1)
P0052 0052

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high

The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the A/F sensor 1 heater.)

q Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.)
q A/F sensor 1 heater

(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002WT

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at

idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-173

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

NBS002WU

Revision: 2005 November

EC-174

TBWM1219E
2006 Q45

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB1584E

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-175

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Revision: 2005 November

EC-176

TBWM1220E
2006 Q45

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1584E

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.3V

NBS002WV

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-177

2006 Q45

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

: Vehicle front

1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector

2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector

PBIB3134E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E32, F32 q Fuse block (J/B) No.1 connector E201 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between the following;
ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) terminal 4 or ECM terminal 24 and A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB1683E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-178

2006 Q45

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-179, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 [at 25°C (77°F)] Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: q Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

D
NBS002WW
E

G H

I J

PBIB1684E

NBS002WX

Revision: 2005 November

EC-179

2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

PFP:226A0

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

NBS001S7

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine speed Engine coolant temperature

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.

OPERATION

Engine speed rpm

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600

OFF

Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
q Engine: After warming up ON
q Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2)

q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. Engine: After warming up Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

NBS001S8
SPECIFICATION ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001S9

DTC No.
P0037 0037 (Bank 1)
P0057 0057 (Bank 2)
P0038 0038 (Bank 1)
P0058 0058 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low

The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high

The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.)
q Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
q Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.)
q Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater

Revision: 2005 November

EC-180

2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001SA

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at

idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start the engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute. E
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-185, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

G
SEF174Y
H
I

Revision: 2005 November

EC-181

2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

NBS001SB

Revision: 2005 November

EC-182

TBWM1221E
2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the

following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500

6 GY

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)

and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

55 PU

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle

for 1 minute under no load

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

I
Approximately 0V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-183

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Revision: 2005 November

EC-184

TBWM1222E
2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the

following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500

25 G

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)

and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

74 B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle

for 1 minute under no load

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

Approximately 0V

I
J
NBS001SC

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-185

2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0018E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B11, E211 q Harness connectors E35, E305 q Fuse block (J/B) No.1 connector B1 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P0037, P0038 P0057, P0058

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-186

PBIB0112E
2006 Q45

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E315, F5 q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.

Terminal No.

Resistance

2 and 3

5.0 - 7.0 [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2, 3, 4 4 and 1, 2, 3

(Continuity should not exist)

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

A EC
C D E F G
NBS001SD
H I J K L M

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

SEF249Y NBS001SE

Revision: 2005 November

EC-187

2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position.

PFP:23796
NBS001ZC

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2)

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB1842E NBS001ZD
SPECIFICATION 0% - 2% Approx. 25% - 50%
NBS001ZE

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0075 0075 (bank 1)
P0081 0081 (bank 2)

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit

An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

q Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
q Intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001ZF

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and wait let it idle for 5 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-193, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Following the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-188

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

NBS001ZG
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-189

TBWM1235E
2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

10 P

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

7 - 12V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

0 - 1.5V

PBIB1790E

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-190

2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-191

TBWM1236E
2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

11 W/B

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

7 - 12V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

0 - 1.5V

PBIB1790E

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-192

2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.

NBS001ZH
A
EC

E
PBIB2422E
F
G
H

I
PBIB0192E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM relay.

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR

OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between the following; ECM terminal 10 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) terminal 1 or ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-193

2006 Q45

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-194, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.

Terminals 1 and 2
1 or 2 and ground

Resistance
7.0 - 7.7 [at 20°C (68°F)]
(Continuity should not exist)

If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

NBS001ZI
PBIB0193E
PBIB2275E NBS001ZJ

Revision: 2005 November

EC-194

2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.

PFP:22680
A
NBS001SF
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB1604E
E
NBS001SG

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

MAS A/F SE-B1

See EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .

CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,500 rpm Idle 2,500 rpm

15% - 35%
G
10% - 35%
H
3.8 - 5.2 g·m/s

16.0 - 21.5 g·m/s

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001SH

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or

shorted.)

A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM q Mass air flow sensor under light load driving condition.

q EVAP control system pressure

sensor

P0101 0101

Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance

q Intake air temperature sensor

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or

shorted.)

A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition.

q Intake air leaks q Mass air flow sensor

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Intake air temperature sensor

Revision: 2005 November

EC-195

2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001SI

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed.

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

With GST Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Check the voltage of "MAS A/F SE-B1" with "DATA MONITOR". 5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. 6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases. If NG, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step.

SEF174Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-196

SEF243Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-

onds.

ENG SPEED

More than 2,000 rpm

THRTL SEN 1

More than 3V

THRTL SEN 2

More than 3V

Selector lever

Suitable position

Driving location

Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.

8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB0199E
D

Overall Function Check

NBS001SJ

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC

might not be confirmed.

With GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "Service $01" with GST.

3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with "Service $01".

4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in

response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.

5. If NG, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

J
SEF534P
K

Revision: 2005 November

EC-197

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

NBS001SK

Revision: 2005 November

EC-198

TBWM1223E
2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

1.0 - 1.2V

q Idle speed

51 B/Y

Mass air flow sensor

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

1.6 - 1.9V

67 B

Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)

q Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS001SL
K

Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?

A or B

>> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection. q Air duct q Vacuum hoses q Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-199

2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

PBIB2417E

3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB2418E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay q Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB1168E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-200

2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-214, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-201

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
NBS001SM
2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the following conditions.

Condition

MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

Approx. 0.4

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.0 - 1.2

2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.6 - 1.9

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
q Crushed air ducts q Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element q Uneven dirt of air cleaner element q Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.

Condition

Voltage V

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

Approx. 0.4

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.0 - 1.2

2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.6 - 1.9

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
q Crushed air ducts q Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element q Uneven dirt of air cleaner element q Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-202

PBIB2371E
PBIB1106E
2006 Q45

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

NBS001SN
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-203

2006 Q45

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.

PFP:22680
NBS001SO

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB1604E NBS001SP

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

MAS A/F SE-B1

See EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .

CAL/LD VALUE

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,500 rpm

15% - 35% 10% - 35%

MASS AIRFLOW

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,500 rpm

3.8 - 5.2 g·m/s 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/s

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001SQ

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0102 0102

Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is

low input

sent to ECM. When engine is running.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Intake air leaks q Mass air flow sensor

P0103 0103

Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is

high input

sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Mass air flow sensor

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Mass air flow sensor circuit

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-204

2006 Q45

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001SR

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step. 5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H
I
J
K
SEF058Y
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-205

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

NBS001SS

Revision: 2005 November

EC-206

TBWM1223E
2006 Q45

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

1.0 - 1.2V

q Idle speed

51 B/Y

Mass air flow sensor

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

1.6 - 1.9V

67 B

Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)

q Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS001ST
K

Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?

P0102 or P0103

P0102 >> GO TO 2.

P0103 >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection. q Air duct q Vacuum hoses q Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-207

2006 Q45

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

PBIB2417E

3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB2418E

PBIB1168E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-208

2006 Q45

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-209, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Condition

MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

Approx. 0.4

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.0 - 1.2

2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.6 - 1.9

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-209

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L
NBS001SU
M
PBIB2371E
2006 Q45

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. q Crushed air ducts q Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element q Uneven dirt of air cleaner element q Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.

Condition

Voltage V

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

Approx. 0.4

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.0 - 1.2

2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.6 - 1.9

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
q Crushed air ducts q Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element q Uneven dirt of air cleaner element q Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

PBIB1106E NBS001SV

Revision: 2005 November

EC-210

2006 Q45

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.

PFP:22630
A
NBS001SW
EC
C

PBIB1604E
E

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

25 (77)

3.3

1.800 - 2.200

80 (176)

1.2

0.283 - 0.359

*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.

CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic

F
G
H
SEF012P
I
NBS001SX

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0112 0112
P0113 0113

Intake air temperature sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor

circuit low input

is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

Intake air temperature sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor q Intake air temperature sensor

circuit high input

is sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure
NOTE:

NBS001SY
L

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

M
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Wait at least 5 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-213, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-211

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

NBS001SZ

Revision: 2005 November

EC-212

TBWM0538E
2006 Q45

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and ground. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

NBS001T0
A

E
PBIB2417E
F

G H

PBIB2418E

PBIB1169E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-213

2006 Q45

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-213, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi-
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.

NBS001T1

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

25 (77)

1.800 - 2.200

2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-214

PBIB1604E
SEF012P NBS001T2
2006 Q45

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

PFP:22630
A
NBS001T3
EC
C

SEF594K
E

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

- 10 (14)

4.4

7.0 - 11.4

20 (68)

3.5

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.

H
SEF012P

CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

On Board Diagnosis Logic
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

NBS001T4

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name

DTC Detecting Condition

Possible Cause

P0117 0117

Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is

sensor circuit low input

sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

P0118 0118

Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is q Engine coolant temperature sensor

sensor circuit high input

sent to ECM.

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

Condition

Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display)

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START

40°C (104°F) 80°C (176°F)

Except as shown above

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time)

When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-215

2006 Q45

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001T5

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-216

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

NBS001T6
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-217

TBWM0539E
2006 Q45

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

NBS001T7

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.

PBIB2417E

2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1246E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F261, F24 q Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0080E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-218

2006 Q45

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
4. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F261, F24 q Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-219, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

A EC
C D E F G H I J K
NBS001T8
L M

PBIB2005E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-219

2006 Q45

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

20 (68)

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.236 - 0.260

2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EM-67, "CYLINDER HEAD" .

SEF012P NBS001T9

Revision: 2005 November

EC-220

2006 Q45

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description

PFP:16119
A
NBS001TA

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
NBS001TB

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

F
SPECIFICATION

THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Selector lever: D

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

More than 0.36V

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V

*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

H
NBS001TC

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0122

Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor q Harness or connectors

0122

2 circuit low input

2 is sent to ECM.

(The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or

shorted.)

(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)

P0123

Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- q Electric throttle control actuator

0123

2 circuit high input

sor 2 is sent to ECM.

(TP sensor 2)

q Accelerator pedal position sensor

(APP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

Revision: 2005 November

EC-221

2006 Q45

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001TD

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-224, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-222

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

NBS001TE
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-223

TBWM0540E
2006 Q45

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

47 L/W

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

50 B

Throttle position sensor 1

66 R

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

69 W

Throttle position sensor 2

91 B

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V More than 0.36V
Less than 4.75V Approximately 0V Less than 4.75V
More than 0.36V Approximately 5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS001TF

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-224

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

D
PBIB2420E
E
F
G

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB0082E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. M

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-223

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-656

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-225

2006 Q45

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-227, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-226

2006 Q45

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

50 (Throttle position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

69 (Throttle position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
7. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS001TG
A

PBIB1530E

G
NBS001TH
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-227

2006 Q45

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

PFP:22630

Component Description

NBS001TI

NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or P0118. Refer to EC-215, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" . The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

SEF594K

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

- 10 (14)

4.4

7.0 - 11.4

20 (68)

3.5

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.

SEF012P

CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001TJ

DTC No.
P0125 0125

Trouble diagnosis name
Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control

DTC detecting condition
q Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine.
q Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit)
q Engine coolant temperature sensor q Thermostat

Revision: 2005 November

EC-228

2006 Q45

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine.

NBS001TK
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Check that "COOLAN TEMP/S" is above 10°C (50°F).

If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.

If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.

4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If "COOLAN TEMP/S" increases to more than 10°C (50°F)

within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will

be OK.

5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

SEF174Y

I
NBS001TL
J

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-229

2006 Q45

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is under cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-217, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

NBS001TM

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

20 (68)

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.236 - 0.260

2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EM-67, "CYLINDER HEAD" .

PBIB2005E
SEF012P NBS001TN

Revision: 2005 November

EC-230

2006 Q45

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.

PFP:22630
A
NBS001TO
EC
C

PBIB1604E
E

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

25 (77)

3.3

1.800 - 2.200

80 (176)

1.2

0.283 - 0.359

*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.

F
G
H
SEF012P
I
NBS001TP

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0127 0127

Intake air temperature too high

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Intake air temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001TQ

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

TESTING CONDITION:

This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road

test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) a. Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-231

2006 Q45

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
b. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. c. Check the engine coolant temperature. d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. q Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture reaches 90°C (194°F). 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Start engine. 5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con-
secutive seconds. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-232, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1917E NBS001TR

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-233, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-212, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-232

2006 Q45

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi-
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

25 (77)

1.800 - 2.200

2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

NBS001TS
A

D
PBIB1604E
E

H
SEF012P

NBS001TT

K L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-233

2006 Q45

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION

PFP:21200

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001TU

Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0128 0128

Thermostat function

The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough.

q Thermostat q Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat q Engine coolant temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001TV

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION:
q For best results, perform at ambient temperature of 10°C (14°F) or higher.
q For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of 10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select "COOLAN TEMP/S" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check that the "COOLAN TEMP/S" is above 60°C (140°F). If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step. If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.

VHCL SPEED SE

80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)

If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-234, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST 1. Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

PBIB1917E NBS001TW

Refer to EC-235, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-234

2006 Q45

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

20 (68)

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.236 - 0.260

2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EM-67, "CYLINDER HEAD" .

NBS001TX
A
EC
C
D
PBIB2005E
E
F
G
H
SEF012P NBS001TY
I
J
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-235

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

PFP:22693
NBS002WY
SEF579Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

SEF580Z NBS002WZ

MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

CONDITION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

SPECIFICATION Fluctuates around 1.5 V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002X0

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.

DTC No.
P0130 0130 (Bank 1)
P0150 0150 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit

q The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V.

q Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
q A/F sensor 1

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002X1

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "A/F SEN1 (B1)" or "A/F SEN1 (B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check "A/F SEN1 (B1)" or "A/F SEN1 (B2)" indication.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-236

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1

If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-242, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.

4. Select "A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276" (for DTC P0130) or "A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286" (for DTC P0150) of "A/F SEN1" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

5. Touch "START".

6. When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.

ENG SPEED

1,300 - 3,200 rpm

Vehicle speed

More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL

1.0 - 8.0 msec

Selector lever

D position

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.

E
SEF576Z

7. Release accelerator pedal fully.

NOTE:

Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.

8. Make sure that "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". If "TESTING" changed to "OUT OF CONDITION", retry from step 6.
9. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULT". If "NG" is displayed, go to EC-242, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF577Z

SEF578Z

Overall Function Check

NBS002X2

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position. 3. Set D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times. 5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. 7. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times. 8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-237

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
9. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-242, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-238

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1

NBS002X3
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-239

TBWM1224E
2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V

PBIB1584E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-240

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-241

TBWM1225E
2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V

PBIB1584E

NBS002X4

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-242

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

: Vehicle front

PBIB3134E
E
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con-

nector

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

I
PBIB1683E
J
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-243

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1

4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank1 Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 16 75 35 56 76 77 57 58

Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1 A/F sensor 1 terminal
1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 16 75 35 56

Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal
1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 76 77 57 58

Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace.
6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: q Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-244

2006 Q45

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
Removal and Installation
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

NBS002X5
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-245

2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

PFP:22693
NBS002X6
SEF579Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF580Z NBS002X7

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

CONDITION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

SPECIFICATION Fluctuates around 1.5 V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002X8

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.

DTC No.
P0131 0131 (Bank 1)
P0151 0151 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit low voltage

q The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.

q Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
q A/F sensor 1

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002X9

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "A/F SEN1 (B1)" or "A/F SEN1 (B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-246

2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1

3. Check "A/F SEN1 (B1)" or "A/F SEN1 (B2)" indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-251, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED VHCL SPEED SE B/FUEL SCHDL Gear position

1,000 - 3,200 rpm More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) 1.5 - 9.0 msec Suitable position

A
EC
C
SEF581Z
D
E

NOTE:

q Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.

q If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4.

7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-251, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-247

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1

NBS002XA

Revision: 2005 November

EC-248

TBWM1224E
2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB1584E

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-249

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1

Revision: 2005 November

EC-250

TBWM1225E
2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1584E

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.3V

NBS002XB

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-251

2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

: Vehicle front

1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector

PBIB3134E
2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector

2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1683E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-252

2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1

4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Bank1

Bank 2

Continuity should exist.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1

Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity should not exist.

5. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace.

6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION: q Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
q Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-253

2006 Q45

DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
Removal and Installation
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

NBS002XC

Revision: 2005 November

EC-254

2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

PFP:22693
A
NBS002XD
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
F
G

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

SEF580Z

NBS002XE

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

J
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5 V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002XF

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

P0132

0132

q Harness or connectors

(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 q The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or M

P0152

circuit high voltage

sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.

shorted.)

0152

q A/F sensor 1

(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002XG

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "A/F SEN1 (B1)" or "A/F SEN1 (B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-255

2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1

3. Check "A/F SEN1 (B1)" or "A/F SEN1 (B2)" indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-260, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED VHCL SPEED SE B/FUEL SCHDL Gear position

1,000 - 3,200 rpm More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) 1.5 - 9.0 msec Suitable position

SEF581Z

NOTE: q Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
q If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-260, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-256

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1

NBS002XH
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-257

TBWM1224E
2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V

PBIB1584E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-258

2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-259

TBWM1225E
2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V

PBIB1584E

NBS002XI

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-260

2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

: Vehicle front

PBIB3134E
E
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con-

nector

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

I
PBIB1683E
J
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-261

2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1

4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank1 Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 16 75 35 56 76 77 57 58

Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1 A/F sensor 1 terminal
1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 16 75 35 56

Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal
1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 76 77 57 58

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-262

2006 Q45

DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
Removal and Installation
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

NBS002XJ
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-263

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

PFP:22693
NBS002XK
SEF579Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF580Z NBS002XL

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

CONDITION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

SPECIFICATION Fluctuates around 1.5 V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002XM

To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

P0133 0133 (Bank 1)
P0153 0153 (Bank 2)

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response

q The response of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time.

q Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
q A/F sensor 1 q A/F sensor 1 heater q Fuel pressure q Fuel injector q Intake air leaks q Exhaust gas leaks q PCV q Mass air flow sensor

Revision: 2005 November

EC-264

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002XN

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II
C 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

5. Select "A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279" (for DTC P0133) or "A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289" (for DTC P0153)

of "A/F SEN1" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

6. Touch "START".

If "COMPLETED" appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step

10. If "COMPLETED" does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to

the following step.

7. After perform the following procedure, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If "TESTING" is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that "TESTING" is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
9. Make sure that "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". If "TESTING" changed to "OUT OF CONDITION", refer to EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULT". If "NG" is displayed, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

H
PBIB0756E
I

PBIB1925E

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Calculate the total value of "Short term fuel trim" and "Long term fuel trim" indications. Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-265

PBIB0758E
2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
q Intake air leaks q Exhaust gas leaks q Incorrect fuel pressure q Lack of fuel q Fuel injector q Incorrect PCV hose connection q PCV valve q Mass air flow sensor 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. 6. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. 8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. 9. Select Service $07 with GST. If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-266

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1

NBS002XO
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-267

TBWM1224E
2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V

PBIB1584E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-268

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-269

TBWM1225E
2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V

PBIB1584E

NBS002XP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-270

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
1. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace.

D
PBIB3133E
E

G H

I J

PBIB1216E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-271

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR"
or "START". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.

4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.

6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.

7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.

9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

PBIB2418E

Yes or No

Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-316, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-328, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-272

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

: Vehicle front

PBIB3134E
E
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con-

nector

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E32, F32 q Fuse block (J/B) No.1 connector E201 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

I
PBIB1683E
J
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-273

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1

8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank1 Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 16 75 35 56 76 77 57 58

Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1 A/F sensor 1 terminal
1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 16 75 35 56

Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal
1 2 5 6

ECM terminal 76 77 57 58

Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-179, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 13.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-274

2006 Q45

DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1

11. CHECK PCV VALVE A

Refer to EC-44, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 12.

NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13.

NG >> Repair or replace.

13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.

CAUTION:

q Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a

hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread G Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

H
NBS002XQ
I

Revision: 2005 November

EC-275

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
NBS002XR

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met.
Engine: After warming up
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

On Board Diagnosis Logic

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

SEF327R NBS00217
SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN RICH
NBS00218

PBIB2030E

DTC No.
P0137 0137 (Bank 1)
P0157 0157 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Heated oxygen sensor The maximum voltage from the sensor is not

2 circuit low voltage

reached to the specified voltage.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 2 q Fuel pressure q Fuel injector q Intake air leaks

Revision: 2005 November

EC-276

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS00219

NOTE:

If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
WITH CONSULT-II

TESTING CONDITION:

For better results, perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and

4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.

F
SEF174Y
G

8. Select "HO2S2 (B1) P1147" (for DTC P0137) or "HO2S2 (B2) P1167" (for DTC P0157) of "HO2S2" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. H
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until "COMPLETED" is displayed.
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-282, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If "CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED" is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

PBIB2373E
L
M

Overall Function Check

NBS0021A

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-277

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-282, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB2024E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-278

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

NBS0021B
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-279

TBWM1226E
2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

6 GY

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met
Engine:Aafter warming up
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

55 PU

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-280

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-281

TBWM1227E
2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

25 G

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)

74 B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

Approximately 0V

q Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS0021C

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-282

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode
with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P017, P0174. Refer to EC-316 . No >> GO TO 3.

E
SEF968Y
F

G H

PBIB2418E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-283

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E315, F5 q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0018E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-284

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0137

P0157

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0137

P0157

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E315, F5

q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-286, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-285

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

NBS0021D SEF174Y

7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

PBIB1672E

PBIB2163E
"HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" should be above 0.78V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is +25%. "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" should be below 0.18V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is -25%. CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-286

2006 Q45

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.

(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this

procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-

sary.

7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

C
PBIB2024E
D

CAUTION:
q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

NBS0021E

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM"

Revision: 2005 November

EC-287

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
NBS002XS

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF327R NBS002XT

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

LEAN RICH

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002XU

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. MALFUNCTION A To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

PBIB1848E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-288

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

MALFUNCTION B

To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors

whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the

various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

PBIB2376E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0138 0138 (Bank 1)
P0158 0158 (Bank 2)

q Harness or connectors

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

q Heated oxygen sensor 2

Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage.

q Heated oxygen sensor 2

q Fuel pressure

q Fuel injector

DTC Confirmation Procedure
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.

NBS002XV
H

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-295, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

J K L M
SEF174Y

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

Revision: 2005 November

EC-289

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN
TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).

SEF174Y

7. Open engine hood.

8. Select "HO2S2 (B1) P1146" (for DTC P0138) or "HO2S2 (B2) P1166" (for DTC P0158) of "HO2S2" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until "COMPLETED" is displayed.
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-295, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If "CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED" is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

PBIB2372E

Overall Function Check
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

NBS002XW

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

With GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-290

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-295, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

A EC
C
PBIB2024E
D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-291

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

NBS001UT

Revision: 2005 November

EC-292

TBWM1226E
2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the

following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500

6 GY

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)

and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

55 PU

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle

for 1 minute under no load

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

I
Approximately 0V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-293

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Revision: 2005 November

EC-294

TBWM1227E
2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the

following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500

25 G

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)

and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

74 B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle

for 1 minute under no load

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

Approximately 0V

I
J
NBS001UU
K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-295

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E315, F5 q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0018E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-296

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0138

P0158

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0138

P0158

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E315, F5

q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

3. Check connectors for water.

Water should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

7. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-297

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-298

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode

with CONSULT-II.

3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.

Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?

Is it difficult to start engine?

E
SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. H
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.

6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.

8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

PBIB2418E

Yes or No

Yes

>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-328, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .

No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-299

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

PBIB0018E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-300

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0138

P0158

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0138

P0158

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E315, F5

q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-301

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

NBS001UV SEF174Y

7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

PBIB1672E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-302

2006 Q45

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.

(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this

procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-

sary.

C
PBIB2024E
D

CAUTION:
q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

NBS001UW

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-303

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
NBS002XX

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

On Board Diagnosis Logic

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

SEF327R NBS001UY
SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN RICH
NBS001UZ

SEF302U

DTC No.
P0139 0139 (Bank 1)
P0159 0159 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 2 q Fuel pressure q Fuel injector q Intake air leaks

Revision: 2005 November

EC-304

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001V0

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
WITH CONSULT-II

TESTING CONDITION:

For better results, perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and

4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN

F
SEF174Y

TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Select "HO2S2 (B1) P0139" or "HO2S2 (B2) P0159" of "HO2S2" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with G

CONSULT-II.

8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. H

NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until "COMPLETED" is displayed.
9. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-310, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If "CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED" is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

K
PBIB2374E
L
M

Overall Function Check

NBS001V1

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-305

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-310, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB2024E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-306

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

NBS001V2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-307

TBWM1226E
2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

6 GY

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

55 PU

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-308

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-309

TBWM1227E
2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

25 G

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)

74 B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

78 OR

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2)

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met

Engine: After warming up

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

Approximately 0V

q Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS001V3

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-310

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode

with CONSULT-II.

3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.

Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?

Is it difficult to start engine?

E
SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. H
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.

6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.

8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

PBIB2418E

Yes or No

Yes

>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-316, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-328, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL

INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .

No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-311

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

PBIB0018E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-312

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0139

P0159

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0139

P0159

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E315, F5

q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-314, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-313

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

NBS001V4 SEF174Y

7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

PBIB1672E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-314

2006 Q45

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.

(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this

procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-

sary.

C
PBIB2024E
D

CAUTION:
q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

NBS001V5

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-315

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

PFP:16600

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001V6

With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

A/F sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel injection control

Fuel injector

DTC No.
P0171 0171 (Bank 1)

Trouble diagnosis name

P0174 0174 (Bank 2)

Fuel injection system too lean

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Intake air leaks

q Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
q The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)

q A/F sensor 1 q Fuel injector q Exhaust gas leaks q Incorrect fuel pressure q Lack of fuel

q Mass air flow sensor

q Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001V7

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

5. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.

a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

SEF968Y

The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.

Engine speed Vehicle speed

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-316

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),

Engine coolant temperature

T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).

(T) condition

When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),

T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.

8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. C
WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.

4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-

nector.

6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is

detected.

7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.

8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.

9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

G
PBIB2418E

NOTE:

If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.

a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min- I utes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

J The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.

Engine speed

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm

Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

Engine coolant temperature

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).

(T) condition

When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),

T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
M 10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.

11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-317

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

NBS001V8

Revision: 2005 November

EC-318

TBWM1228E
2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

21 W/B 22 Y 23 R/L 44 BR

Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 Fuel injector No. 7

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed
E

PBIB1584E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm

at idle

PBIB0042E

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
K
q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

L
PBIB0043E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-319

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Revision: 2005 November

EC-320

TBWM1229E
2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

40 BR 41 G 42 B/R 63 L

Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 Fuel injector No. 8

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed
E

PBIB1584E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

PBIB0042E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB0043E
K
Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.3V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-321

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

NBS001V9

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.

PBIB1216E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-322

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect corresponding air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

E
PBIB3134E

: Vehicle front

1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

harness connector

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Bank 1

Bank 2

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1

Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-323

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-534, "DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)" , EC-
715, "FUEL PUMP" .) q Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) q Fuel lines (Refer to MA-15, "Checking Fuel Lines" .) q Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check "MASS AIR FLOW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec: at idling 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in "Service $01" with GST.
3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec: at idling 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-195, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-324

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

A EC
C D E
PBIB0133E
F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-325

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect harness connectors F21, F201 (bank 1) and F41, F221 (bank 2).

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between the following;
harness connector F21 terminal 5 and ground, harness connector F41 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 7. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

Cylinder 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector terminal F21 terminal 3 F21 terminal 2 F21 terminal 1 F21 terminal 6 F41 terminal 3 F41 terminal 2 F41 terminal 1 F41 terminal 6

ECM terminal 23 22 21 44 42 41 40 63

Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

PBIB2438E PBIB0180E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-326

2006 Q45

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

9. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II

Provide battery voltage between the following terminals, and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.

Cylinder
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector F201 F221

terminal

(+)

()

2 5
1

Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. 4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. 5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2. 6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 7. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector. 8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

A EC
C D
PBIB2449E
E F G H I J K L M
PBIB1726E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-327

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

PFP:16600

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001VA

With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

A/F sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel injection control

Fuel injector

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0172 0172 (Bank 1)
P0175 0175 (Bank 2)

Fuel injection system too rich

q Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
q The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)

q A/F sensor 1 q Fuel injector q Exhaust gas leaks q Incorrect fuel pressure q Mass air flow sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001VB

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

5. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.

a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

SEF968Y

The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.

Engine speed

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm

Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

Engine coolant temperature (T) condition

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. 8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-328

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

If engine starts, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and

check for fouling, etc.

WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then

restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-

nector.

5. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is

detected.

6. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.

7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.

8. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175

should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB2418E

NOTE:

If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.

a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain G
time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
H

The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-

ditions should be satisfied at the same time.

Engine speed

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm

Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),

Engine coolant temperature

T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).

(T) condition

When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),

T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.

10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and L check for fouling, etc.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-329

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

NBS001VC

Revision: 2005 November

EC-330

TBWM1228E
2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

21 W/B 22 Y 23 R/L 44 BR

Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 Fuel injector No. 7

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed
E

PBIB1584E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm

at idle

PBIB0042E

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
K
q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

L
PBIB0043E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-331

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Revision: 2005 November

EC-332

TBWM1229E
2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

40 BR 41 G 42 B/R 63 L

Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 Fuel injector No. 8

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed
E

PBIB1584E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

PBIB0042E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB0043E
K
Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.3V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-333

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

NBS001VD

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.

PBIB1216E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-334

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect corresponding air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

E
PBIB3134E

: Vehicle front

1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

harness connector

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Bank 1

Bank 2

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1

Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-335

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-534, "DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)" , EC-
715, "FUEL PUMP" .) q Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
>> Repair or replace.
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check "MASS AIR FLOW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec: at idling 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in "Service $01" with GST.
3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec: at idling 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-195, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-336

PBIB0133E
2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

8. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I

Without CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect harness connectors F21, F201 (bank 1) and F41, F221 (bank 2).

Cylinder 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector terminal F21 terminal 3 F21 terminal 2 F21 terminal 1 F21 terminal 6 F41 terminal 3 F41 terminal 2 F41 terminal 1 F41 terminal 6

ECM terminal 23 22 21 44 42 41 40 63

Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

F
PBIB2438E
G
H
I
J
PBIB0180E
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-337

2006 Q45

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

9. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUELINJECTOR-II

Provide battery voltage between the following terminals, and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.

Cylinder
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector F201 F221

terminal

(+)

()

2 5
1

PBIB2449E

Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. 4. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors. 7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-338

2006 Q45

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

PFP:22630
A
NBS001VE
EC
C

PBIB1249E
E

Fluid temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

20 (68)

3.5

2.3 - 2.7

50 (122)

2.2

0.79 - 0.90

*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.

F
G
H
SEF012P
I
NBS001VF

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0181 0181

Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Fuel tank temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001VG

L NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

M
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-342, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to following step.

4. Check "COOLAN TEMP/S" value.
If "COOLAN TEMP/S" is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK.
If "COOLAN TEMP/S" is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.

SEF174Y

5. Cool engine down until "COOLAN TEMP/S" is less than 60°C (140°F).

6. Wait at least 10 seconds.

7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-342, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-339

2006 Q45

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-340

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

NBS001VH
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-341

TBWM0547E
2006 Q45

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

NBS001VI

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

PBIB2417E

3. Check voltage between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1249E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

PBIB0316E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-342

2006 Q45

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors B211, M141

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between ECM and "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"

G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-343, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"
terminals 4 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure.

K
NBS001VJ
L
M

Temperature °C (°F) 20 (68) 50 (122)

Resistance k 2.3 - 2.7
0.79 - 0.90

Removal and Installation
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

PBIB0200E NBS001VK

Revision: 2005 November

EC-343

2006 Q45

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

PFP:22630
NBS001VL

PBIB1249E

Fluid temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

20 (68)

3.5

2.3 - 2.7

50 (122)

2.2

0.79 - 0.90

*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.

SEF012P NBS001VM

DTC No.
P0182 0182
P0183 0183

Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input
Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input

DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Fuel tank temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001VN

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-346, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-344

SEF174Y
2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

NBS001VO
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-345

TBWM0547E
2006 Q45

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

NBS001VP

PBIB2417E

3. Check voltage between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1249E

PBIB0316E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-346

2006 Q45

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors B211, M141

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between ECM and "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"

G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-346, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

K
NBS001VQ
L
M

Temperature °C (°F) 20 (68) 50 (122)

Resistance k 2.3 - 2.7
0.79 - 0.90

Removal and Installation
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

PBIB0200E NBS001VR

Revision: 2005 November

EC-347

2006 Q45

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

PFP:16119

Component Description

NBS001VS

PBIB0145E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS001VT

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Selector lever: D

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001VU

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. P0222 0222
P0223 0223

Trouble diagnosis name Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input
Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input

DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-348

2006 Q45

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001VV

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-351, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-349

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

NBS001VW

Revision: 2005 November

EC-350

TBWM0548E
2006 Q45

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

47 L/W

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

More than 0.36V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released

50 B

Throttle position sensor 1

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

Less than 4.75V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

66 R

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
G

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

Less than 4.75V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released

69 W

Throttle position sensor 2

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

More than 0.36V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

91 B

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

Approximately 5V

K
NBS001VX
L
M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-351

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB2420E

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB0082E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-350

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-656

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-352

2006 Q45

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

C >> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-354, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
M
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-353

2006 Q45

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

50 (Throttle position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

69 (Throttle position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
7. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS001VY
PBIB1530E NBS001VZ

Revision: 2005 November

EC-354

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MIS-

FIRE

PFP:00000 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001W0

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed

On board diagnosis of misfire

The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)

On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-

heating, the MIL will blink.

When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change.

When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.

If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.

When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.

If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.

2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only G light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. H

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0300 0300

Multiple cylinder misfire detected

Multiple cylinder misfire.

P0301 0301
P0302 0302
P0303 0303
P0304 0304
P0305 0305
P0306 0306
P0307 0307

No.1 cylinder misfire detected
No. 2 cylinder misfire detected
No. 3 cylinder misfire detected
No. 4 cylinder misfire detected
No. 5 cylinder misfire detected
No. 6 cylinder misfire detected
No. 7 cylinder misfire detected

No. 1 cylinder misfires. No. 2 cylinder misfires. No. 3 cylinder misfires. No. 4 cylinder misfires. No. 5 cylinder misfires. No. 6 cylinder misfires. No. 7 cylinder misfires.

q Improper spark plug

q Insufficient compression

q Incorrect fuel pressure

q The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
K
q Fuel injector

q Intake air leak

q The ignition signal circuit is open or

shorted

q Lack of fuel

q Drive plate

q A/F sensor 1

q Incorrect PCV hose connection

P0308 0308

No. 8 cylinder misfire detected

No. 8 cylinder misfires.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-355

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001W1

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.

5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-357, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

PBIB0164E

b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.

Engine speed Vehicle speed
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.

Engine speed Around 1,000 rpm Around 2,000 rpm More than 3,000 rpm

Time Approximately 10 minutes Approximately 5 minutes Approximately 3.5 minutes

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-356

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
1. Stop engine 2. Turn ignition switch OFF 3. Visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (manifold) and muffler for dents. OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace it.
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II 1. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?

NBS001W2
A EC
C D E F G H I

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 10.

K
PBIB0133E
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-357

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
4. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect harness connectors F21, F201 (bank 1) and F41, F221 (bank 2).

Cylinder 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector terminal F21 terminal 3 F21 terminal 2 F21 terminal 1 F21 terminal 6 F41 terminal 3 F41 terminal 2 F41 terminal 1 F41 terminal 6

ECM terminal 23 22 21 44 42 41 40 63

Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

PBIB2438E PBIB0180E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-358

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

5. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II

Provide battery voltage between the following terminals, and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.

Cylinder
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector F201 F221

terminal

(+)

()

2 5
1

Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-706, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

A EC
C D
PBIB2449E
E F G H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-359

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.

PBIB0041E

Spark should be generated.

CAUTION: q Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.

PBIB2325E

q It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.

NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. 3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-731 .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-360

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

8. CHECK SPARK PLUG A

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.

OK or NG

OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For

spark plug type, refer to EM-30 .

NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.

2. GO TO 9.

9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

D
SEF156I
E

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.

2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion.

Spark should be generated.

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-30 . H
10. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-67, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" ,.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.

NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

11. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Install all removed parts.

2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . L
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13.

NG >> GO TO 12.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-534, "DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)" , EC-
715, "FUEL PUMP" .) q Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-80 .) q Fuel lines (Refer to MA-15, "Checking Fuel Lines" .) q Fuel filter for clogging

>> Repair or replace.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-361

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

13. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

Items

Specifications

Target idle speed

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

Ignition timing

12 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Follow the Basic Inspection.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-362

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE
14. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect corresponding air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

E
PBIB3134E

: Vehicle front

1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

harness connector

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Bank 1

Bank 2

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1

Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-363

2006 Q45

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE

15. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-179, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.
16. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II Check mass air flow sensor signal in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec: 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec:

at idling at 2,500 rpm

With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in "Service $01" with GST.

3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec: 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec:

at idling at 2,500 rpm

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .

17. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-91, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Repair or replace.
18. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

>> GO TO 19.
19. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-364

2006 Q45

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.

PFP:22060
A
NBS001W3
EC
C

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB0021E
E
NBS001W4

The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name

DTC Detected Condition

Possible Cause

P0327

0327

(bank 1)

Knock sensor circuit low

An excessively low voltage from the sensor

P0332 0332

input

is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors

(bank 2) P0328

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

q Knock sensor

0328

(bank 1)

Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor

P0333

input

is sent to ECM.

0333

(bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

J
NBS001W5

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. L
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-365

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS

NBS001W6

Revision: 2005 November

EC-366

TBWM0549E
2006 Q45

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

15 W

Knock sensor (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Approximately 2.5V

36 W

Knock sensor (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Approximately 2.5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

NBS001W7
E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590k [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between the following;
ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor (bank 1) terminal 1, ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor (bank 2) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

F G H I J K L M
PBIB0021E

Check the following. q Harness connector F40, F241 q Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

Refer to EC-368, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-367

2006 Q45

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connector F40, F241 q Harness connector F32, E32 q Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590k [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-368

PBIB2417E
NBS001W8 SEF478Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Removal and Installation
KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-83, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

NBS001W9
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-369

2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.

PFP:23731
NBS001WA
PBIB0562E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

ENG SPEED

q Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB2448E NBS001WB
SPECIFICATION Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication.
NBS001WC

DTC No.
P0335 0335

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit

q The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking.
q The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running.
q The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Crankshaft position sensor (POS) q Signal plate

Revision: 2005 November

EC-370

2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001WD

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-

tion switch ON.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-

onds at idle speed.

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-375, "Diagnostic Procedure"

If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.

4. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-375, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

F
SEF058Y

WITH GST

Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-371

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

NBS001WE

Revision: 2005 November

EC-372

TBWM1230E
2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

switch OFF
D

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-373

2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-374

TBWM0551E
2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

[Engine is running]

1.0 - 2.0V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

13 P/L

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle
1.0 - 2.0V

E
PBIB1041E
F

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1042E
H
NBS001WF
I
J
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

M
PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-375

2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0022E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness connectors F33, E33 q Harness connectors E35, E305 q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM relay
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

SEF479Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-376

2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E305, E35

q Harness connectors E33, F33

q Harness connectors E32, F32

q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground C

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. F
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E305, E35

q Harness connectors E33, F33

q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM

J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) K

Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

9. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace the signal plate.

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-377

2006 Q45

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connec-
tor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) 2 (+) - 3 (-)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Except 0 or

Removal and Installation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EM-26, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" .

NBS001WG
PBIB0563E
PBIB0564E NBS001WH

Revision: 2005 November

EC-378

2006 Q45

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust camshaft sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.

PFP:23731
A
NBS001WI
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
F

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB2448E
I
NBS001WJ

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

q The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

for the first few seconds during engine

cranking.

q Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

P0340 0340

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit

q The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM

during engine running.

q Starter motor (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

q The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal

q Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

pattern during engine running.

q Dead (Weak) battery

Revision: 2005 November

EC-379

2006 Q45

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001WK

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-382, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-382, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-380

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

NBS001WL
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-381

TBWM1231E
2006 Q45

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

14 L/W

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

1.0 - 4.0V

PBIB1039E

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

0 - 1.5V

PBIB1040E

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

NBS001WM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-382

2006 Q45

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.

Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E
F

3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. H
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

J
PBIB2419E
K
L
M

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F105, M135 q Harness for open or short between ECM and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) q Harness for open or short between ECM relay and camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SEF481Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-383

2006 Q45

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F32, E32 q Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-385, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-384

2006 Q45

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connec-
tor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) 3 (+) - 1 (-) 2 (+) - 1 (-) 3 (+) - 2 (-)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Except 0 or

Removal and Installation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .

NBS001WN
A
EC
C
D
PBIB0563E
E
F
G
H
PBIB0564E NBS001WO
I
J
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-385

2006 Q45

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of A/F sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.

PFP:20905
NBS002XY
PBIB2055E

DTC No. P0420 0420 (Bank 1)
P0430 0430 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Three way catalyst (manifold)

Catalyst system efficiency below threshold

q Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly.
q Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity.

q Exhaust tube q Intake air leaks q Fuel injector q Fuel injector leaks q Spark plug

q Improper ignition timing

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002XZ

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.

SEF189Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-386

2006 Q45

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
8. Select "DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION" then "SRT WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If "INCMP" of "CATALYST" changed to "CMPLT", go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until "INCMP" of "CATALYST" changes to "CMPLT" (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not "CMPLT", stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.

A EC
C
PBIB1784E
D E
F

12. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-388, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

G
PBIB1785E
H
I

SEF535Z

Overall Function Check

NBS002Y0

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st L trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

5. Open engine hood.

6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals ECM terminals 55 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 74 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.

7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.

8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-388, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

q 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 0 - 0.3 0.6 - 1.0

PBIB2056E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-387

2006 Q45

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (Manifold).

NBS001WS

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

Items

Specifications

Ignition timing

12° ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

Target idle speed

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

PBIB1216E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-388

2006 Q45

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

5. CHECK FUEL INJECTORS A

1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42,

44, 63 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

3. Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-707 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> Perform EC-710, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

PBIB1527E
E

CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure.

NOTE:

Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.

3. Start engine.

4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.

PBIB0041E

7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.

8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.

9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.

10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm

between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion

as shown in the figure.

11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark

is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.

Spark should be generated.

PBIB2325E

q It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.

NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 7.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-389

2006 Q45

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. 3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-731 .
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-30 .
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 9.

SEF156I
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. 2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-30 .
10. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel tube assembly.
Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. 3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-390

2006 Q45

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description

PFP:14950
A
NBS001WT

NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC trouble diagnosis for other DTC.

SEF323U

In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. F Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP

canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-

trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic

G
NBS001WU

Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow

are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve stuck closed

P0441 0441

q EVAP control system pressure sensor and

the circuit

q Loose, disconnected or improper connection

EVAP control system does not operate

of rubber tube

EVAP control system

properly, EVAP control system has a leak q Blocked rubber tube

incorrect purge flow

between intake manifold and EVAP control

system pressure sensor.

q Cracked EVAP canister

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve circuit
L
q Accelerator pedal position sensor

q Blocked purge port

DTC Confirmation Procedure

q EVAP canister vent control valve

M
NBS001WV

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of more than 5°C (41°F).

Revision: 2005 November

EC-391

2006 Q45

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
4. Select "PURG FLOW P0441" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch "START". If "COMPLETED" is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take at least 35 seconds.)

Selector lever VHCL SPEED SE ENG SPEED B/FUEL SCHDL COOLAN TEMP/S

Suitable position 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) 500 - 3,800 rpm 1.0 - 10.0 msec 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)

SEF189Y

PBIB0826E
If "TESTING" is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. 7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-
393, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Overall Function Check

NBS001WW

Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminal 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.

Air conditioner switch Headlamp switch Rear window defogger switch Engine speed Gear position

ON ON ON Approx. 3,000 rpm Any position other than P, N or R

PBIB1109E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-392

2006 Q45

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-

sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.

9. If NG, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

EC NBS001WX

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.

NG >> Replace EVAP canister.

2. CHECK PURGE FLOW

With CONSULT-II

1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser- F vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

2. Start engine and let it idle.

3. Select "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with

CONSULT-II.

4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.

5. Touch "Qd" and "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to adjust "PURG

VOL CONT/V" opening and check vacuum existence.

PURG VOL CONT/V

Vacuum

100%

Should exist.

0%
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4.

Should not exist.

J
PBIB1678E
K

3. CHECK PURGE FLOW

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-

vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE

EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.

5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist. 6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let engine idle.

Vacuum should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-393

2006 Q45

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .

3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.

6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-394

SEF367U SEF368U
PBIB1678E
2006 Q45

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water. EC
Water should not exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION

Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-437 , P0453 EC-444 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.

2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.

NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-435, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 12.

NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

K Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13.

NG >> Replace it.

13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-395

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

PFP:14950

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001WY

NOTE: If DTC P0442 is displayed with P0447, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0447. (See EC-419 .) This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following "Vacuum test" conditions. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.

SEF323U

DTC No.
P0442 0442

Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure)

DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly.

Possible cause
q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve q Incorrect fuel filler cap used q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. q Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent q Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor q Loose or disconnected rubber tube q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit q Fuel tank temperature sensor q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged q Water separator q EVAP canister is saturated with water q EVAP control system pressure sensor q Fuel level sensor and the circuit q Refueling control valve q ORVR system leaks

Revision: 2005 November

EC-396

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
q Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on.

q If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.

q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001WZ

NOTE:

q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait

at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

q Perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is

placed on flat level surface.

q Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.

COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)

INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)

5. Select "EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442" of "EVAPORATIVE

SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

Follow the instruction displayed.

SEF475Y

PBIB0829E

NOTE:

If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to

EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-398, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-397

SEC763C
2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select "Service $07" with GST. If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-398, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P1442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-548, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

NBS001X0

SEF915U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-398

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

A
EC
C
D
SEF916U
E
F
G H
I
PEF917U
J
K L
M
SEF200U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-399

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.) 3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12 volts until
the end of test.)

PBIB0189E
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-403, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EC-420, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.

SEF200U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-400

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 11.

No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.

No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q EVAP canister for damage q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

SEF596U
E
F G H
I

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

K With CONSULT-II

1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

2. Start engine.

3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL

CONT/V" opening to 100%.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to

2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-401

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-102, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-343, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 21.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-402

2006 Q45

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE A

Check refuelling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-38, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

22. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE

Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, loose-

ness and improper connection.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 23.

NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

23. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

F Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 24.

NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

Refer to DI-22, "CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 25.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
WATER SEPARATOR 1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. 2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. 4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged. 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: q Do not disassemble water separator.

K
NBS001X1
L
M

PBIB1032E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-403

2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

NBS0022O

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*1

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Battery Throttle position sensor

Battery voltage*1 Throttle position

EVAP canister

EVAP canister purge volume

purge flow control control solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

A/F sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel tank temperature sensor

Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*2

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

PURG VOL C/V

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

SEF337U NBS0022P
SPECIFICATION 0% --

Revision: 2005 November

EC-404

2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0443 0443

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed.

Possible cause

NBS0022Q
A

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve

(The valve is stuck open.)

q EVAP canister vent control valve

q EVAP canister

q Hoses

(Hoses are connected incorrectly or

clogged.)

DTC Confirmation Procedure
NOTE:

NBS0022R
E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Select "PURG VOL CN/V P1444" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with

CONSULT-II.

5. Touch "START".

L
PBIB0839E

6. Start engine and let it idle until "TESTING" on CONSULT-II changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take

approximately 10 seconds.)

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.

7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC408, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. 4. Select "Service $07" with GST. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-405

2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram

NBS0022S

Revision: 2005 November

EC-406

TBWM1232E
2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

D
[Engine is running]
q Idle speed

45 L/Y

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

11 - 14V

PBIB0050E
F

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than

100 seconds after starting engine)

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

PBIB0051E

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-407

2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

NBS0022T

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-

CUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB3130E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0148E

Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-408

2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water. EC
Water should not exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.

OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.

3. Start engine.

4. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with

CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the

valve opening.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-435, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-409

K
PBIB1678E
L M
2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 14.

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q EVAP canister for damage q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-553, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Clean or replace water separator.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

SEF596U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-410

2006 Q45

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value)
100%
0%

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

NBS0022U
A
EC
C
D

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

PBIB0149E
E
F
G H
PBIB0150E
I
NBS0022V
J

Revision: 2005 November

EC-411

2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID

VALVE

PFP:14920

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

NBS001X2

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*1

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Battery Throttle position sensor

Battery voltage*1 Throttle position

EVAP canister

EVAP canister purge volume

purge flow control control solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

A/F sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel tank temperature sensor

Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Wheel sensor

Vehicle speed*2

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

PURG VOL C/V

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

SEF337U NBS001X3
SPECIFICATION 0% --

Revision: 2005 November

EC-412

2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

NBS001X4
A

P0444 0444
P0445 0445

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted

q Harness or connectors

An excessively low voltage signal is sent

(The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)

to ECM through the valve

q EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve
C
q Harness or connectors

An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)

to ECM through the valve

q EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001X5

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

J
SEF058Y
K
L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-413

2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram

NBS001X6

Revision: 2005 November

EC-414

TBWM1232E
2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

D
[Engine is running]
q Idle speed

45 L/Y

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

11 - 14V

PBIB0050E
F

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than

100 seconds after starting engine)

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

PBIB0051E

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-415

2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

NBS001X7

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-

CUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB3130E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0148E

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-416

2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A

With CONSULT-II

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.

2. Start engine.

3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with

CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the

valve opening.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-417, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value)
100%
0%

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

E
PBIB1678E
F

G H

NBS001X8

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Revision: 2005 November

EC-417

PBIB0149E
PBIB0150E
2006 Q45

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS001X9

Revision: 2005 November

EC-418

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows "EVAP Control System" diagnosis.

PFP:14935
A
NBS001XA
EC
C
D
SEF032W
E

H
PBIB0026E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

VENT CONT/V

q Ignition switch: ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve.

P0447 0447

EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open

EVAP canister vent control valve remains open under specified driving conditions.

NBS001XB

SPECIFICATION

OFF

NBS001XC

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)

q EVAP canister vent control valve

q EVAP canister vent control valve
M
q EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
q Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
q Water separator q EVAP canister is saturated with water q Vacuum cut valve

Revision: 2005 November

EC-419

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001XD

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE: q If DTC P0447 is displayed with P0442, P0455, P0456, P1442 or P1456, first perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P0447.
q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-424, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y
With GST Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B TESTING CONDITION: q Perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface. q Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with
CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.

COOLAN TEMP/S

0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)

INT/A TEMP SE

0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)

5. Select "EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed.

SEF475Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-420

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

PBIB0829E
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to D
EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed.

If "NG" is displayed, go to the following step.

NOTE:

Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister

purge volume control solenoid valve properly.

7. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn ON.

8. Disconnect hose from water separator.

9. Select "VENT CONTROL/V" of "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
10. Touch "ON" and "OFF" alternately.

SEC763C
H
I

PBIB1679E

11. Make sure the following.

Condition

Air passage continuity between A and

VENT CONTROL/V

OFF

Yes

If the result is NG, go to EC-424, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0442, EC-398 .

SEF337X

Overall Function Check
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

NBS00237

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP canister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

With GST 1. Disconnect hose from water separator. 2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-421

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

3. Verify the following.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
No supply

Air passage continuity No Yes

If the result is NG, go to EC-424, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0442, EC-398 .

AEC783A

Revision: 2005 November

EC-422

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram

NBS001XE
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-423

TBWM1233E
2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

117 L/Y
119 R 120 R

EVAP canister vent control valve
Power supply for ECM

DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1. INSPECTION START

NBS001XF

Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON
2. Select "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch "ON/OFF" on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1679E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-424

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
EC

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

E
PBIB0026E
F G H

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0152E

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness connectors M139, B209

q Harness connectors B251, B401

q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM relay

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-425

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F105, M135 q Harness connectors M141, B211 q Harness connectors B251, B401 q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-428, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.

3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-426

PBIB0026E
2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE A

Refer to EC-428, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

3. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE

Refer to EC-577, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Replace vacuum cut valve.

4. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister.

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 5.

No >> GO TO 7.

SEF596U

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair it.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-427

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON.

NBS001XG

SEF337X

5. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Condition VENT CONTROL/V

Air passage continuity between A and B

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.

PBIB1679E

7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

8. Perform step 6 again.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-428

2006 Q45

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Without CONSULT-II

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.

2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

D
SEF337X

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the

following conditions.

Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Condition

Air passage continuity between A and B

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

OFF

Yes

G
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

PBIB0154E

If OK, go to next step.

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

5. Perform step 3 again.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-429

2006 Q45

DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis.

PFP:16935
NBS0022W
SEF032W

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

VENT CONT/V

q Ignition switch: ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0448 0448

EVAP canister vent control EVAP canister vent control valve remains

valve close

closed under specified driving conditions.

PBIB0026E
NBS0022X
SPECIFICATION OFF
NBS0022Y
Possible cause q EVAP canister vent control valve q EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit q Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve q Water separator q EVAP canister is saturated with water

Revision: 2005 November

EC-430

2006 Q45

DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NBS0022Z
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine.

4. Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH) for

a maximum of 15 minutes.

NOTE:

If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker.

5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-433, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

G
PBIB1917E
H
I

Revision: 2005 November

EC-431

2006 Q45

DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Wiring Diagram

NBS00230

Revision: 2005 November

EC-432

TBWM1233E
2006 Q45

DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

switch OFF
D

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

117 L/Y

EVAP canister vent control valve

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE

NBS00231
G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.

3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-403, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Clean or replace water separator.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-435, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

K
PBIB0026E
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-433

2006 Q45

DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
4. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> GO TO 7.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q EVAP canister for damage q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

SEF596U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-434

2006 Q45

DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON.

NBS00232
A
EC
C
D

5. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

SEF337X
E
F

Condition VENT CONTROL/V

Air passage continuity between A and B

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.

H
PBIB1679E

7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

8. Perform step 5 again.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.

2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. K

M
SEF337X

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Condition

Air passage continuity between A and B

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.

PBIB0154E

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

5. Perform step 3 again.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-435

2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

PFP:25085

Component Description

NBS001XH

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.

PBIB0026E

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS001XI

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

EVAP SYS PRES q Ignition switch: ON

Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001XJ

NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-492, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0452 0452

EVAP control system pressure An excessively low voltage from the

sensor low input

sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q EVAP control system pressure sensor

Revision: 2005 November

EC-436

2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001XK

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Always perform test at a temperature of more than 5°C (41°F).

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

5. Make sure that "FUEL T/TEMP SE" is more than 0°C (32°F).

6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.

If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-439, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5. Select "Service $07" with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-439, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

G
SEF194Y
H
I
J
K
PBIB1110E
L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-437

2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram

NBS001XL

Revision: 2005 November

EC-438

TBWM1234E
2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

32 G

EVAP control system pressure sensor

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V

48 R

Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] sure sensor)

Approximately 5V

67 B

Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

E
Approximately 0V
F

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS001XM

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.

Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-439

2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0026E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B401, B251 q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0155E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-440

2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal

67.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors B401, B251

q Harness connectors B211, M141

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

H >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. q Harness connectors B401, B251 q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-441

2006 Q45

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION: q Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. q Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
6. Check voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

NBS001XN

Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Not applied
-26.7 (-200 mmHg, -7.87)

Voltage V
1.8 - 4.8 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

PBIB1173E

CAUTION: Discard any EVAP control system pressure sensor which has dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such a concrete floor; use a new one.
7. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-442

2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description

PFP:25085
A
NBS001XO

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the

ECM increases as pressure increases.

E
PBIB0026E
F

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

NBS001XP
J

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

EVAP SYS PRES q Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic

Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

K
NBS001XQ

NOTE:

If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.

Refer to EC-492, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

P0453 0453

EVAP control system pressure An excessively high voltage from the

sensor high input

sensor is sent to ECM.

q EVAP canister vent control valve q EVAP canister

q Water separator

q Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to water separator

Revision: 2005 November

EC-443

2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001XR

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Make sure that "FUEL T/TEMP SE" is more than 0°C (32°F). 6. Wait at least 10 seconds. 7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Select "Service $07" with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF194Y PBIB1110E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-444

2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram

NBS001XS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-445

TBWM1234E
2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

32 G

48 R

67 B

ITEM
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor)
Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)

CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON]
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V Approximately 5V
Approximately 0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS001XT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-446

2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
EC

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

PBIB0026E
E

Water should not exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.

3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor

terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> GO TO 4.

K
PBIB0155E
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-447

2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal
67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B401, B251 q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B401, B251 q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-448

2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE A

Refer to EC-428, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.

NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 12.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

12. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-403, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace water separator.

13. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister.

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> GO TO 16.

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q EVAP canister for damage q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END Revision: 2005 November

EC-449

K
SEF596U
L M
2006 Q45

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION: q Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
q Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
6. Check voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

NBS001XU

Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Not applied
-26.7 (-200 mmHg, -7.87)

Voltage V
1.8 - 4.8 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

PBIB1173E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-450

2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:14950
A
NBS001XV

NOTE: If DTC P0455 is displayed with P0447, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0447. (See EC-419 .) EC This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

SEF323U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0455 0455

EVAP control system gross leak detected

EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly.

Possible cause

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to

close.

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve

q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.

q Leak is in line between intake manifold

and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
J
q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks

q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)

leaks

q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.

q Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP

control system pressure sensor

q Loose or disconnected rubber tube

q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
q EVAP canister purge volume control sole- M
noid valve and the circuit

q Fuel tank temperature sensor

q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged.

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Refueling control valve

q ORVR system leaks

CAUTION: q Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
q If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-451

2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001XW

CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE: q Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
q Perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface.
q Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select "EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB2869E

PBIB0829E
NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode and make sure that "EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]" is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-453, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, go to EC-398, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P1442 is displayed, go to EC-548, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-452

SEC763C
2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select "Service $07" with GST.
q If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-453, "Diagnostic Procedure" . q If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-398, "Diagnostic Procedure" . q If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" . q If P1442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-548, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

A EC
C D E
NBS001XX
F G H I
SEF915U
J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-453

2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EC-420, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
PBIB3131E

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-454

SEF916U
2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode
with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace.

A EC
C D E
PEF917U
F G H
SEF200U
I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-455

2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.) 3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12 volts until
the end of test.)

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

SEF200U

With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL
CONT/V" opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB1678E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-456

2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13. E
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-102, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.

NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine.

2. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with

CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the

valve opening.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.
K

15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

L
PBIB1678E
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-457

2006 Q45

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-38, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
19. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-458

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:14950
A
NBS001XY

NOTE:

If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.

This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume

control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak

diagnosis.

If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.

If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.

If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.

SEF323U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve

q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.

q Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP

canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-

trol valve.

q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks

q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks

q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent

q Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control sys-

P0456

Evaporative emission control system very

tem pressure sensor q EVAP system has a very small leak. q Loose or disconnected rubber tube

0456

small leak (negative

q EVAP system does not operate prop- q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit

pressure check)

erly.

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve and the circuit

q Fuel tank temperature sensor

q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged

q Water separator

q EVAP canister is saturated with water

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Refueling control valve

q ORVR system leaks

q Fuel level sensor and the circuit

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

CAUTION: q Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-459

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

q If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001XZ

NOTE: q After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: q Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. q If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour. Fuel filler cap is removed. Refilled or drained the fuel. EVAP component parts is/are removed. q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch "OFF" and leave the vehicle in a cool
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output
voltage condition of the "FUEL LEVEL SE" meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).

PBIB2870E

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Select "EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB0837E
6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-462, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: q If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . q Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-460

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

Overall Function Check
WITH GST

NBS001Y0
A

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st

trip DTC might not be confirmed.

CAUTION:

q Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.

q Do not start engine.

q Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).

1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. D

2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Connect GST and select "Service $08".
6. Using "Service $08" control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close) and vacuum cut valve bypass valve (open).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-462, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step.
8. Disconnect GST.
9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
13. Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.

F
PBIB3131E
G
H
I
J
SEF462UI
K
L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-461

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

NBS001Y1

2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.

SEF915U SEF916U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-462

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

A EC
C D E
PEF917U
F G H I
SEF200U
J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-463

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.) 3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12 volts until
the end of test.)

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-467, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EC-420, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.

SEF200U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-464

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 11.

No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.

No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

SEF596U
E
F G H
I

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

K With CONSULT-II

1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

2. Start engine.

3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL

CONT/V" opening to 100%.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to

2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-465

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-102, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 21.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-466

2006 Q45

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE A

Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-38, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

22. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE

Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, loose-

ness and improper connection.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 23.

NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

23. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

F Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 24.

NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

Refer to DI-22, "CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 25.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

K
NBS001Y2
L
M

PBIB1032E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-467

2006 Q45

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

PFP:25060
NBS001Y3

PBIB2462E

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001Y4

NOTE: q If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected.

DTC No.
P0460 0460

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Fuel level sensor circuit noise

Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Combination meter q Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001Y5

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-469, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-468

SEF195Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-16, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-16, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-20, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

NBS001Y6
A EC
C D E F G
NBS001Y7
H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-469

2006 Q45

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

PFP:25060
NBS001Y8

PBIB2462E

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001Y9

NOTE: q If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven.

DTC No.
P0461 0461

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance

The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Combination meter q Fuel level sensor

Overall Function Check

NBS001YA

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-8, "FUEL TANK" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.

WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. 6. Select "FUEL LEVEL SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-470

2006 Q45

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

7. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
8. Select "FUEL PUMP" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULTII.
9. Touch ON and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. If NG, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

A
EC
C
SEF195Y
D

WITH GST

NOTE:

Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8

Imp gal) in advance.

1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. F
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-80, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.

4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.

5. Turn ignition switch ON.

6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.

7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.

8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).

9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.

10. If NG, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION

NBS001YB
J

Refer to DI-16, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-16, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter" .

2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT

Refer to DI-20, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

NBS001YC

Revision: 2005 November

EC-471

2006 Q45

DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

PFP:25060
NBS001YD

PBIB2462E

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001YE

NOTE: q If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.

DTC No. P0462 0462
P0463 0463

Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit low input
Fuel level sensor circuit high input

DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Combination meter q Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001YF

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-473, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-472

SEF195Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-16, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-16, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-20, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

NBS001YG
A EC
C D E F G
NBS001YH
H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-473

2006 Q45

DTC P0500 VSS

PFP:32702

Description

NBS001YI

NOTE: q If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the VDC/TCS/ABS control unit by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001YJ

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0500 0500

Vehicle speed sensor

The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven.

q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
q Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted)
q Wheel sensor
q Combination meter
q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001YK

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read "VHCL SPEED SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-475, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step.
3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED

1,400 - 6,000 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL

More than 4.5 msec

Selector lever

Except P or N position

PW/ST SIGNAL

OFF

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-475, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF196Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-474

2006 Q45

DTC P0500 VSS

Overall Function Check

NBS001YL

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st A

trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST

1. Lift up drive wheels.

2. Start engine.

3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in "Service $01" with GST.

The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with

suitable gear position.

4. If NG, go to EC-475, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT

NBS001YM
E

Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.

NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-7, "COMBINATION METERS" .
H

>> INSPECTION END I

Revision: 2005 November

EC-475

2006 Q45

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM

PFP:23781

Description

NBS001YN

NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.).

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001YO

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0506 0506

Idle speed control system The idle speed is less than the target idle RPM lower than expected speed by 100 rpm or more.

q Electric throttle control actuator q Intake air leak

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001YP

NOTE: q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
q If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-759, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
q Always perform the test at a temperature above -10°C (14°F).

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Open engine hood. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select "DATA MONITOR"
mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-477, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

SEF174Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-476

2006 Q45

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

NBS001YQ
A

1. Start engine and let it idle.

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.

NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.

2. REPLACE ECM

D 1. Stop engine.

2. Replace ECM.

3. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to E BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .

4. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" .

5. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

6. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

7. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-477

2006 Q45

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM

PFP:23781

Description

NBS001YR

NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.).

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001YS

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0507 0507

Idle speed control system The idle speed is more than the target idle RPM higher than expected speed by 200 rpm or more.

q Electric throttle control actuator q Intake air leak q PCV system

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001YT

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

SEF174Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-478

2006 Q45

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION

NBS001YU
A

Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.

NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and let it idle.

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.

3. REPLACE ECM F

1. Stop engine.

2. Replace ECM.

3. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to G BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .

4. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" .

5. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

6. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

7. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . I

>> INSPECTION END J

Revision: 2005 November

EC-479

2006 Q45

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.

PFP:49763
NBS001YV

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB0027E NBS001YW

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

PW/ST SIGNAL

q Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned

engine

Steering wheel: Being turned

OFF ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001YX

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-492, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0550 0550

Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the

sensor circuit

sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Power steering pressure sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001YY

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-482, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-480

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

NBS001YZ
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-481

TBWM0556E
2006 Q45

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

12 R

67 B 68 L

ITEM
Power steering pressure sensor
Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor) Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor)

CONDITION [Engine is running] q Steering wheel: Being turned [Engine is running] q Steering wheel: Not being turned
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage) 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS001Z0

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-482

2006 Q45

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F5, E315 q Harness for open or short between ECM and PSP sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F5, E315 q Harness for open or short between PSP sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D
PBIB0027E
E

PBIB0188E

I J

K L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-483

2006 Q45

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

6. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F5, E315 q Harness for open or short between ECM and PSP sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to EC-484, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace PSP sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.

Condition Steering wheel: Being turned. Steering wheel: Not being turned.

Voltage 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V

NBS001Z1

Removal and Installation
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .

MBIB0126E NBS001Z2

Revision: 2005 November

EC-484

2006 Q45

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc.

PFP:23710
A
NBS001Z7
EC
C

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB1164E
E
NBS001Z8

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

P0603 0603

ECM power supply cir- ECM back-up RAM system does not function

cuit

properly.

[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.]

q ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS001Z9

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn

ON.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-487, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-485

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY

NBS001ZA

Revision: 2005 November

EC-486

TBWM0557E
2006 Q45

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

121 W

Power supply for ECM (Back-up)

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

NBS001ZB
D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q 10A fuse q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 harness connector M145 q Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

H
MBIB0026E
I
J
K

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-487

2006 Q45

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "SELF DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-485, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "Service $04" with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-485, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . 3. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" . 4. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-488

2006 Q45

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.

PFP:23710
A
NBS001Z3
EC

On Board Diagnosis Logic
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No.
P0605 0605

Trouble diagnosis name A)
Engine control module B) C)

DTC detecting condition ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

PBIB1164E
E
NBS001Z4

Possible cause

q ECM

FAIL-SAFE MODE

ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.

Detected items

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

q ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5

Malfunction A

degrees) by the return spring.

q ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
DTC Confirmation Procedure

J
NBS001Z5

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION K B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-490, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-489

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P0605 ECM
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-490, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON. 4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-490, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "SELF DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-489, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "Service $04" with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-489, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-490

SEF058Y SEF058Y
NBS001Z6
2006 Q45

DTC P0605 ECM

2. REPLACE ECM A

1. Replace ECM.

2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to

BL-202, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" .

3. Perform EC-77, "VIN Registration" .

4. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

5. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

6. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

D >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-491

2006 Q45

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

PFP:18919
NBS0022G

DTC No.
P0643 0643

Trouble diagnosis name
Sensor power supply circuit short

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high.

q Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor
q EVAP control system pressure sensor
q Refrigerant pressure sensor
q Power steering pressure sensor

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0022H

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-495, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-492

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

NBS0022I
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-493

TBWM1243E
2006 Q45

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

48 R

Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] sure sensor)

Approximately 5V

49 L

Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

68 L

Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

82 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

83 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

90 R

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

91 B

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

98 R

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

106 W

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-494

2006 Q45

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3.

NBS0022J
A

E
PBIB2417E
F

G H

PBIB2432E

PBIB0914E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-495

2006 Q45

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

APP sensor terminal 6

EC-493

EVAP control pressure sensor terminal 1

EC-438

Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1

EC-745

PSP sensor terminal 1

EC-481

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK COMPONENTS

Check the following. q EVAP control pressure sensor (Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection" .) q Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-92, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .) q Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-484, "Component Inspection" .) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-652, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-496

2006 Q45

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH Component Description

PFP:23006
A
NBS0024Y

When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.

ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the "ON" signal) exists.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS0024Z

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

C
SPECIFICATION

Selector lever: P or N

P/N POSI SW

q Ignition switch: ON

Selector lever: Except above

OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS00250

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

E
Possible cause

P0850 0850

q Harness or connectors

Park/neutral position switch

The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving.

[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.]
q Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

DTC Confirmation Procedure

q TCM

G
NBS00251

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Select "P/N POSI SW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the "P/N POSI SW" signal under the follow-
ing conditions. K

Position (Selector lever)

Known-good signal

N or P position

Except above position

OFF

If NG, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step.
3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.

M
SEF212Y

ENG SPEED

More than 1,200 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL

2.0 - 31.8 msec

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)

Selector lever

Suitable position

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF213Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-497

2006 Q45

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH

Overall Function Check

NBS00252

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Position (Selector lever)

Voltage (Known good data)

P or N position

Approx. 0V

Except above position

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

3. If NG, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

MBIB0043E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-498

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH

NBS00253
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-499

TBWM0573E
2006 Q45

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

102 GY/R PNP switch

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON] q Selector lever: P or N [Ignition switch: ON] q Selector lever: Except above

DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

NBS00254

Refer to AT-38, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START. Does starter motor operate? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. 3. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1. 4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and fuse block (J/B) No. 1 terminal 17D.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and fuse block (J/B) No. 1

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-500

2006 Q45

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH

5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A

1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector E201.

2. Check harness continuity between fuse block (J/B) No. 1 terminal 1E and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and fuse block (J/B) No. 1 terminal 19D. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors F105, M135

q Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse block (J/B) No. 1

J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) NO. 1

Refer to PG-70, "FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) NO. 1" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace fuse block (J/B) No. 1

9. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III

1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8. Refer to AT-102, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-501

2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Component Description
Intake valve timing control position sensors are located in the front of cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC. The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in four places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position.

PFP:23731
NBS00209

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2)

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic

SEF359Z NBS0020A
SPECIFICATION -5° - 5°CA Approx. 0° - 20°CA
NBS0020B

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1140 1140 (bank 1)
P1145 1145 (bank 2)

Intake valve timing control An excessively high or low voltage from the

position sensor circuit

sensor is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control position sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Intake valve timing control position sensor
q Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
q Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
q Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft sprocket

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0020C

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 10 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-507, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-502

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

WITH GST

Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-503

2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

NBS0020D

Revision: 2005 November

EC-504

TBWM1240E
2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION [Engine is running]

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

q Warm-up condition

0 - 1.0V

q Idle speed

0 - 1.0V

72 W

Intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: 2,000rpm

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

PBIB2046E

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
J

Revision: 2005 November

EC-505

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Revision: 2005 November

EC-506

TBWM1241E
2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION [Engine is running]

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

q Warm-up condition

0 - 1.0V

q Idle speed

0 - 1.0V

53 W

Intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

PBIB2046E

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

J
NBS0020E
K
L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-507

2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector.

PBIB2422E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ECM relay q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ECM

SEF509Y

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between intake valve timing control position sensor terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F32, E32 q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control position sensor and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-508

2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

6. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

AND SHORT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between the following;

ECM terminal 72 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 1) terminal 2 or

ECM terminal 53 and intake valve timing control position sensor (bank 2) terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-510, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Replace intake valve timing control position sensor.

8. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

9. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

J Refer to EC-385, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

10. CHECK CAMSHAFT SPROCKET L

Check accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft sprocket. Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal pick-up cutout of camshaft sprocket.

11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-509

2006 Q45

DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

NBS0020F

5. Check resistance as shown below.

Terminal No. (Polarity)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

3 (+) - 1 (-)

2 (+) - 1 (-)

Except 0 or

3 (+) - 2 (-)

6. If NG, replace intake valve timing control position sensor.

Removal and Installation
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" .

SEF362Z
PBIB0194E NBS0020G

Revision: 2005 November

EC-510

2006 Q45

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No.
P1148 1148 (Bank 1)
P1168 1168 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Closed loop control function

The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition.
The closed loop control function for bank 2 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition.

PFP:22690
A
NBS002Y1

EC
Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or

shorted.)

q A/F sensor 1

q A/F sensor 1 heater

DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for A/F sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-511

2006 Q45

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT

PFP:47850

Description

NBS0021J

The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from VDC/ TCS/ABS control unit to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but also for ECM after TCS related repair.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0021K

Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC No.
P1211 1211

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

TCS control unit

ECM receives a malfunction information from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit.

Possible cause q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit q TCS related parts

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0021L

TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-512, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

SEF058Y NBS0021M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-512

2006 Q45

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description

PFP:47850
A
NBS0021N

NOTE: q If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

q If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.

Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .

This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse

signals are exchanged between ECM and VDC/TCS/ABS control unit.

Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but also for ECM after TCS related repair.

On Board Diagnosis Logic
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

NBS0021O
E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The CAN communication line is open or

P1212 1212

TCS communication line

ECM can not receive the information from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit continuously.

shorted.) q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

q Dead (Weak) battery

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0021P

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. I
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-513, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

SEF058Y

NBS0021Q

Revision: 2005 November

EC-513

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Control

PFP:00000
NBS0021R

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*1

Battery Wheel sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor

Battery voltage*1 Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature

Cooling fan control

Air conditioner switch

Air conditioner ON signal

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Refrigerant pressure

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.

Actuator Cooling fan relay

The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].

Cooling Fan Operation

Revision: 2005 November

EC-514

PBIB2447E
2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays as follows.

Cooling fan speed Stop (OFF)

1 OFF

Cooling fan relay 2
OFF

OFF

Low (LOW) Middle (MID)

OFF ON

ON OFF

OFF

High (HI)*

OFF

*: Cooling fan-2 operates at high speed, and cooling fan-1 operates at middle speed.
D
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Cooling Fan Motor

The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.

Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed

(+)

(-)

3 and 4

Middle (MID)

1 and 2

High (HI)

1 and 2

3 and 4

The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

I
NBS0021S

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less

OFF

Engine coolant temperature is between q Engine: After warming up, idle the 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)

LOW

COOLING FAN

engine

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

Engine coolant temperature is between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)

MID

Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more

Revision: 2005 November

EC-515

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0021T

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No.
P1217 1217

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Engine over temperature (Overheat)

q Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat).
q Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat).
q Engine coolant level was not added to the system using the proper filling method.
q Engine coolant is not within the specified range.

q Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
q Cooling fan q Radiator hose q Radiator q Radiator cap q Water pump q Thermostat For more information, refer to EC-532, "Main 13 Causes of Overheating" .

CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-7, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-11, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.

Overall Function Check

NBS0021U

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

SEF621W

Revision: 2005 November

EC-516

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
4. Perform "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Never change cooling fan speed from "LOW" to "HI" or from "HI" to "LOW" directly. Change the speed through "MID" to prevent cooling fan motor from damage.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST 1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 3. Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine. 4. Turn air conditioner switch ON. 5. Turn blower fan switch ON. 6. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to the following step. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 9. Connect 200 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 10. Restart engine. 11. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch ON.
12. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
13. If NG, go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to the following step.
14. Turn ignition switch OFF. 15. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 16. Disconnect 200 resistor then connect 150 resistor to engine
coolant temperature sensor harness connector.

A EC
C
SEF646X
D E F G
SEF621W
H I J K
SEC163BA
L M
PBIB1667E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-517

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
17. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan-2 operates at higher speed than the speed at step 12. Be careful not to overheat engine.
18. If NG, go to EC-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

MEC475B

Revision: 2005 November

EC-518

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Wiring Diagram

NBS0021V
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-519

TBWM0565E
2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

28 LG

Cooling fan relay-1 (Middle)

[Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Not operating
[Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Middle speed or high speed
operating

89 SB

Cooling fan relay -3(High)

[Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Not operating [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: High speed operating

97 L/OR

Cooling fan relay-2 (Low)

[Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Not operating [Engine is running] q Cooling fan: Low speed operating

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS0021W

Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 5.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Perform "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II and touch "LOW" on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION: Never change cooling fan speed from "LOW" to "HI" or from "HI" to "LOW" directly. Change the speed through "MID" to prevent cooling fan motor from damage.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
525, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF784Z

Revision: 2005 November

EC-520

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MIDDLE SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Perform "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch "MID" on the CONSULT-II screen. 2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed
than low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan middle speed control circuit. (Go to
EC-528, "PROCEDURE B" .)
4. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Perform "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch "HI" on the CONSULT-II screen. CAUTION: Never change cooling fan speed from "LOW" to "HI" or from "HI" to "LOW" directly. Change the speed through "MID" to prevent cooling fan motor from damage. 2. Make sure that cooling fan-2 operates at higher speed than middle speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
530, "PROCEDURE C" .)

PBIB1668E

G H

I
SEF785Z
J

K L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-521

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
5. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1 and -3. 3. Start engine and let it idle. 4. Set temperature lever at full cold position. 5. Turn air conditioner switch ON. 6. Turn blower fan switch ON.

PBIB2427E

7. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
525, "PROCEDURE A" .)

6. CHECK COOLING FAN MIDDLE SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-1 and disconnect cooling fan relay-2. 3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Connect 200 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper-
ate at higher speed than low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check cooling fan middle speed control circuit. (Go to
EC-528, "PROCEDURE B" .)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-522

PBIB2428E SEC163BA
PBIB1667E
2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
7. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-3. 3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 4. Disconnect 200 resistor then connect 150 resistor to engine
coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan-2 operates at
higher speed than middle speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
530, "PROCEDURE C" .)
8. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Check the following for leak
q Hose q Radiator q Water pump
Refer to CO-20, "WATER PUMP" .
9. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure : 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/ cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace radiator cap.

A EC
C D
MEC475B
E F G H I
SLC754A
J K L M

10. CHECK COMPONENT PARTS
Check the following. q Thermostat (Refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .) q Water control valve (Refer to CO-22, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .) q Engine coolant temperature sensor (Refer to EC-219, "Component Inspection" .) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-523

SLC755A
2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
11. CHECK MAIN 13 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-532, "Main 13 Causes of Overheating" . >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-524

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 10A fuse q Fuse, fusible link and relay block (J/B) connector E3 q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

E
PBIB2428E
F

PBIB2450E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-525

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.

3. Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB2426E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 40A fusible link q Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and ground, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB1670E PBIB2426E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-526

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 1 and ECM terminal 97.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E34, F34

q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and ECM F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-2

Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.

9. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. K
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-527

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB2427E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 10A fuse q 40A fusible link q Fuse, fusible link and relay block (J/B) connector E3 q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motors-1 and -2 harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 6, cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and ground, cooling fan relay-1 terminal 3 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0887E PBIB2426E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-528

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2 and ECM terminal 28.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E34, F34

q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and ECM F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.

7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. K
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-529

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
PROCEDURE C
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-3. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB2428E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 10A fuse q Fuse, fusible link and relay block (J/B) connector E3 q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and cooling fan relay-3 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB2450E PBIB2426E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-530

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 1 and ECM terminal 89.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E34, F34

q Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and ECM F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-3

Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.

7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2

Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. K
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-531

2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

Main 13 Causes of Overheating

NBS0021X

Engine Step

Inspection item

Equipment

Standard

Reference page

OFF

q Blocked radiator

q Visual

No blocking

q Blocked condenser

q Blocked radiator grille

q Blocked bumper

q Coolant mixture

q Coolant tester

50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-11

q Coolant level

q Visual

Coolant up to MAX level CO-8 in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck

q Radiator cap

q Pressure tester

59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)

CO-12

ON*2

q Coolant leaks

q Visual

No leaks

CO-8

ON*2

q Thermostat

q Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses

Both hoses should be hot CO-22

ON*1

q Cooling fan

q CONSULT-II

Operating

See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-514 ).

OFF

q Combustion gas leak q Color checker chemical Negative

tester 4 Gas analyzer

ON*3

q Coolant temperature q Visual

Gauge less than 3/4

gauge

when driving

q Coolant overflow to reservoir tank

q Visual

No overflow during driving CO-8 and idling

OFF*4

q Coolant return from

q Visual

reservoir tank to radia-

tor

Should be initial level in reservoir tank

CO-8

OFF

q Water control valve

q Remove and inspect the valve

Within the specified value CO-22

OFF

q Cylinder head

q Straight gauge feeler gauge

0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-67 mum distortion (warping)

q Cylinder block and pis- q Visual

tons

No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston

EM-83

*1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-4, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

Component Inspection
COOLING FAN RELAY-1 1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.

NBS0021Y

Condition 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 OFF
3. If NG, replace relay.

Continuity Yes No

COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3 1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-532

PBIB0077E
2006 Q45

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.

Conditions 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No current supply
3. If NG, replace relay.

Continuity Yes No

COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI)

Cooling fan motor terminals

(+)

(-)

3 and 4

1 and 2

3 and 4

Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

A EC
C
PBIB0098E
D E F G
SEF734W
H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-533

2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:17001
NBS0021Z

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*

Mass air flow sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor

Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature

Fuel pump control

Battery

Battery voltage*

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

Actuator
Fuel pump control module (FPCM)

This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the following conditions.

Conditions

Amount of fuel flow

q Engine cranking

q Engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F).

high

q Engine is running under heavy load and high speed conditions

Except the above

low

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.

Supplied voltage
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Approximately 8V

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

FPCM

q Engine: Cranking q Engine: Idle q Engine coolant temperature: More than 10°C (50°F)

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P1220 1220

Fuel pump control module (FPCM)

An improper voltage signal from the FPCM, which is supplied to a point between the fuel pump and the dropping resistor, is detected by ECM.

SEF387X NBS00220
SPECIFICATION HI LOW
NBS00221
Possible cause q Harness or connectors
(FPCM circuit is shorted.) q Dropping resistor q FPCM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-534

2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NBS00222
A

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

2. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates less than 70°C

(158°F). If not, cool down the engine.

3. Start engine.

4. Hold vehicle at the following conditions for 12 seconds.

ENG SPEED

1,175 - 3,075 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE B/FUEL SCHDL Selector lever

More than 70 km/h (43 MPH) 2.0 - 31.7 msec Suitable position

G
SEF189Y

5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST

Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-535

2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)

Wiring Diagram

NBS00223

Revision: 2005 November

EC-536

TBWM1242E
2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

38 G/R

Fuel pump control module (FPCM) check

[When cranking engine] [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

4 - 6V
D

[When cranking engine]

0 - 0.5V

39 B/R

Fuel pump control module (FPCM)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

8 - 12V

q Idle speed

[Ignition switch: ON]

q For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch ON

0 - 1.5V

113 GY

Fuel pump relay

[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON] q More than 5 seconds after turning ignition
switch ON

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

G
H
NBS00224
I
J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

M
PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-537

2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
2. CHECK FPCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect fuel pump control module (FPCM) harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between FPCM terminal 2 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0032E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M141, B211 q Harness for open or short between FPCM and harness connector B211
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK FPCM GROUND CIRCUIT-I FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between FPCM terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0099E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-538

2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)

5. CHECK FPCM GROUND CIRCUIT-II FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness connector.

2. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between the following;

"fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 1 and dropping

resistor terminal 2,

FPCM terminal 4 and dropping resister terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Check harness continuity between the following; FPCM terminal 4 and ground, "fuel level sensor and fuel pump" terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

PBIB1249E
E

Continuity should not exist. F
5. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors B63, B263

q Harness for open or short between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" and dropping resistor

q Harness for open or short between FPCM and dropping resistor

q Harness for open or short between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" and ground

q Harness for open or short between FPCM and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK FPCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 38 and FPCM terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M
Continuity should exist.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 38 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should not exist.

4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-539

2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F105, M135 q Harness connectors M141, B211 q Harness for open or short between ECM and FPCM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK FPCM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 39 and FPCM terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F105, M135 q Harness connectors M141, B211 q Harness for open or short between ECM and FPCM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. CHECK FPCM
Refer to EC-540, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace FPCM.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE

NBS00225

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-540

PBIB0032E
2006 Q45

DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Check voltage between FPCM terminal 4 and ground under the following conditions.

Condition

Voltage

When engine cranking

Approx. 0V

After starting engine

Approx. 5V

4. If NG, replace fuel pump control module.

A EC
C D
PBIB0101E
E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-541

2006 Q45

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

PFP:16119
NBS00226
PBIB0145E NBS00227

DTC No.
P1225 1225

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- q Electric throttle control actuator

learning performance sively low.

(TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS00228

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-543, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-542

2006 Q45

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the intake air duct. 3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS00229
A
EC
C
D
E
PBIB2439E
F
G H
NBS0022A
I J
K L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-543

2006 Q45

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

PFP:16119
NBS0022B
PBIB0145E NBS0022C

DTC No.
P1226 1226

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not perlearning performance formed successfully, repeatedly.

Possible cause
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0022D

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-544

2006 Q45

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the intake air duct. 3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS0022E
A
EC
C
D
E
PBIB2439E
F
G H
NBS0022F
I J
K L
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-545

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

PFP:14950

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0022K

NOTE: If DTC P1442 is displayed with P0447, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0447 first. (See EC-419 .) This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using vapor pressure in the fuel tank. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve will then be opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel tank. If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

SEF323U

DTC No.
P1442 1442

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
q Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.

q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks

q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent

EVAP control system small leak detected (positive pressure)

EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly.

q Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor
q Loose or disconnected rubber tube

q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit

q Fuel tank temperature sensor
q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged

q Water separator q EVAP canister is saturated with water

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Fuel level sensor and the circuit q Refueling control valve

q ORVR system leaks

Revision: 2005 November

EC-546

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure

A
NBS0022L

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION:

Perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface.

q Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.

COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)

INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)

5. Select "EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442" of "EVAPORATIVE

SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

Follow the instruction displayed.

H
PBIB2869E

PBIB0829E

NOTE:

If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to

EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .

6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed.

If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-548, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.

SEC763C

Revision: 2005 November

EC-547

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select "Service $07" with GST. If P1442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-548, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-398, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

NBS0022M

2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> q Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
q Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

SEF915U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-548

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

A
EC
C
D
SEF916U
E
F
G H
I
PEF917U
J
K L
M
SEF200U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-549

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.) 3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the
end of test.)

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-553, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EC-420, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.

SEF200U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-550

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 11.

No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.

No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

SEF596U
E
F G H
I

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

K With CONSULT-II

1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

2. Start engine.

3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL

CONT/V" opening to 100%.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to

2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-551

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-102, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 21.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-552

2006 Q45

DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE A

Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-38, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

22. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE

Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, loose-

ness and improper connection.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 23.

NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.

23. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

F Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 24.

NG >> Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.

24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

Refer to DI-22, "CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 25.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

K
NBS0022N
L
M

PBIB1032E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-553

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

PFP:14710

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0023B

NOTE: If DTC P1456 is displayed with P1442, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1456 first. This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using vapor pressure in the fuel tank in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P1442 will be detected. If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.

SEF323U

DTC No.
P0456 0456

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
q Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.

q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks

q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent

Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check)

q Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor

q EVAP system has a very small leak. q Loose or disconnected rubber tube

q EVAP system does not operate prop- q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit

erly.

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve and the circuit

q Absolute pressure sensor

q Fuel tank temperature sensor
q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged

q Water separator q EVAP canister is saturated with water

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Refueling control valve q ORVR system leaks

q Fuel level sensor and the circuit

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

Revision: 2005 November

EC-554

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
q Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on.

q If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.

q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0023C

NOTE:

q After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.

q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait

at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

q Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.

q If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi- E cle for more than 1 hour.

Fuel filler cap is removed.

Refilled or drained the fuel.

EVAP component parts is/are removed.

q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.15V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the "FUEL LEVEL SE" meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

H
I
J
PBIB2870E
K

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Select "EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB0837E

6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE: q If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" .
q Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-555

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

Overall Function Check
WITH GST

NBS0023D

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

CAUTION: q Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.

q Do not start engine.

q Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).

1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.

2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Connect GST and select "Service $08".
6. Using "Service $08" control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close) and vacuum cut valve bypass valve (open).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step.
8. Disconnect GST.
9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
13. Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.

PBIB3131E SEF462UI

Revision: 2005 November

EC-556

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> q Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
q Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.

NBS0023E
A EC
C D E
SEF915U
F G H I J K L M
SEF916U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-557

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

PEF917U SEF200U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-558

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts EC
until the end of test.)

3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the

end of test.)

PBIB0189E

4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),

then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.

NOTE:

q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.

5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak

detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

SEF200U
L

Refer to EC-562, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace water separator.

9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT

Refer to EC-420, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-559

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

SEF596U

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-560

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 15. E
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-102, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.

NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

J Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 19.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 21.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-561

2006 Q45

DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-38, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
22. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
23. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-22, "CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

NBS0023F

PBIB1032E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-562

2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

PFP:17372
A
NBS0023G

The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister.

The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from being applied to the fuel tank.

The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and generally remains closed. It opens only for on

board diagnosis.

The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground)

signal, the valve is opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the

fuel tank.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

G
PBIB0026E
H

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

VC/V BYPASS/V q Ignition switch: ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

SEF323U

NBS0023H

SPECIFICATION

OFF

M
NBS0023I

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P1490 1490

Vacuum cut valve bypass An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM

valve circuit

through vacuum cut valve bypass valve.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
q Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

Revision: 2005 November

EC-563

2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0023J

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-566, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-564

2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Wiring Diagram

NBS0023K
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-565

TBWM1244E
2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

112 G/Y
119 R 120 R

Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Power supply for ECM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]

0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS0023L

Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Select "VC/V BYPASS/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch "ON/OFF" on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB3138E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-566

2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
3. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
EC

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

E
PBIB0026E
F G H

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0158E

Check the following.

q Harness connectors B401, B251

q Harness connectors B209, M139

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM relay

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 112 and vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-567

2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B401, B251 q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Refer to EC-568, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Perform "VC/V BYPASS/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

NBS0023M

4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

Condition VC/V BYPASS/V

Air passage continuity between A and B

Yes

OFF

Operation takes less than 1 second.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-568

PBIB3138E
PBIB0149E
2006 Q45

DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

With GST
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Operation takes less than 1 second.

A EC
C D
PBIB0160E
E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-569

2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

PFP:17372

Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

NBS0023N

The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister. The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from being applied to the fuel tank. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

PBIB0026E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

VC/V BYPASS/V q Ignition switch: ON

SEF323U NBS0023O
SPECIFICATION OFF

Revision: 2005 November

EC-570

2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P1491 1491

Vacuum cut valve bypass Vacuum cut valve bypass valve dose not

valve

operate properly.

Possible cause

NBS0023P
A

q Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

q Vacuum cut valve

q Bypass hoses for clogging

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

and circuit

q EVAP canister vent control valve

q Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut

valve clogged

q Hose between vacuum cut valve and

EVAP canister clogged

q EVAP canister

q EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging

q Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve

q Refueling control valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0023Q

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION:

q Always perform test at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41 to 86°F).

q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.

5. Select "VC CUT/V BP/V P1491" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with

CONSULT-II.

6. Touch "START".

SEF210Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-571

2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

7. When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take at least 30 seconds.)

ENG SPEED Selector lever VHCL SPEED SE B/FUEL SCHDL

More than 1,000 rpm Suitable position More than 36 km/h (22 MPH) 1.0 - 10.0 msec

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 3.
8. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-574, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF211Y

SEF239Y

Overall Function Check

NBS0023R

Use this procedure to check the overall function of vacuum cut valve bypass valve. During this check, the 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. 2. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from
port B . 3. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from
port A . 4. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out
of port A . 5. Supply battery voltage to the terminal. 6. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B . 7. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A . 8. If NG, go to "EC-574, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-572

SEF530Q
2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE Wiring Diagram

NBS0023S
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-573

TBWM1244E
2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

112 G/Y
119 R 120 R

Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Power supply for ECM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]

0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS0023T

Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
3. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
4. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
5. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
6. Turn ignition switch ON.

7. Select "VC/V BYPASS/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II and touch "ON".
8. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
9. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-574

PBIB3161E
PBIB3138E
2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
3. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. 3. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B. 4. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A. 5. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. 6. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector. 7. Supply battery voltage to the terminal. 8. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B. 9. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7.
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging or disconnection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE PORT
Check EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Clean EVAP purge port.
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Pinch the fresh air hose. 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister.

A EC
C D E F G
PBIB0635E
H I J K L M

AEC630A

Revision: 2005 November

EC-575

2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
7. CHECK BYPASS HOSE
Check bypass hoses for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace hoses.
8. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Refer to EC-577, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
9. CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-577, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace vacuum cut valve.
10. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace.
11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-450, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
13. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-576

2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-428, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
15. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace fuel tank.
16. CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-41, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel tank.
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Perform "VC/V BYPASS/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

ON OFF

Condition VC/V BYPASS/V

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Operation takes less than 1 second.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-577

G H

NBS0023U

K L

M
PBIB3138E

PBIB0149E
2006 Q45

DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

With GST
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Operation takes less than 1 second.

VACUUM CUT VALVE Check vacuum cut valve as follows: q Plug port C and D with fingers. q Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from
port B . q Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from
port A . q Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out
of port A . q Open port C and D . q Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C . q Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D .

PBIB0160E SEF379Q

Revision: 2005 November

EC-578

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH Component Description

PFP:25551
A
NBS0023V

ICC steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of

switch, and determines which button is operated.

Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for the ICC function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB2434E
F
NBS0023W

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

MAIN SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CANCEL SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION MAIN switch: Pressed MAIN switch: Released CANCEL switch: Pressed CANCEL switch: Released

SPECIFICATION

OFF
H
ON

OFF

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed

RESUME/ACC SW q Ignition switch: ON

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released

OFF

SET SW

q Ignition switch: ON

SET/COAST switch: Pressed SET/COAST switch: Released

ON OFF

DISTANCE switch: Pressed

DIST SW

q Ignition switch: ON

DISTANCE switch: Released

OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0023X

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:

If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to

EC-489 .

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1564 1564

ICC steering switch

q An excessively high voltage signal from the ICC steering switch is sent to ECM.
q ECM detects that input signal from the ICC steering switch is out of the specified range.
q ECM detects that the ICC steering switch is stuck ON.

q Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
q ICC steering switch q ECM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-579

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0023Y

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Press DISTANCE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-582, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-580

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

NBS0023Z
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-581

TBWM1245E
2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

67 B

99 G/OR

ITEM Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)
ICC steering switch

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] q ICC steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] q MAIN switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q SET/COAST switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q DISTANCE switch: Pressed

DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V
Approximately 4.3V Approximately 0V Approximately 1.3V Approximately 3.7V Approximately 3V Approximately 2.2V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS00240

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-582

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

2. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "MAIN SW", "RESUME/ACC SW", "SET SW", "DIST SW" and "CANCEL SW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULTII.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.

Switch MAIN switch

Monitor item MAIN SW

CANCEL switch

CANCEL SW

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

RESUME/ACC SW

SET/COAST switch SET SW

DISTANCE switch DIST SW

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Indication ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.

Switch MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
SET/COAST switch
DISTANCE switch
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3.

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Voltage [V] Approx. 0 Approx. 4.3 Approx. 1.3 Approx. 4.3 Approx. 3.7 Approx. 4.3 Approx. 3.0 Approx. 4.3 Approx. 2.2 Approx. 4.3

E
MBIB0064E
F

G H

PBIB0311E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-583

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

3. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect ICC steering switch harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between ICC steering switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Combination switch (spiral cable) q Harness for open and short between ECM and ICC steering switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and ICC steering switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Combination switch (spiral cable) q Harness for open and short between ECM and ICC steering switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-585, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace ICC steering switch.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-584

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH

Component Inspection
ICC STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect ICC steering switch.
2. Check continuity between ICC steering switch terminals 1 and 2 with pushing each switch.

Switch MAIN switch
CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch
DISTANCE switch

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Resistance [] Approx. 0
Approx. 5,500 Approx. 310 Approx. 5,500 Approx. 2,600 Approx. 5,500 Approx. 1,400 Approx. 5,500 Approx. 740 Approx. 5,500

If NG, replace ICC steering switch.

NBS00241
A EC
C D
SEC008D
E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-585

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

PFP:25551

Component Description

NBS00242

ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated.

Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

PBIB2434E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS00243

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

MAIN SW

q Ignition switch: ON

MAIN switch: Pressed MAIN switch: Released

ON OFF

CANCEL SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CANCEL switch: Pressed CANCEL switch: Released

ON OFF

RESUME/ACC SW q Ignition switch: ON

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released

ON OFF

SET SW

q Ignition switch: ON

SET/COAST switch: Pressed SET/COAST switch: Released

ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS00244

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-489 .

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1564 1564

ASCD steering switch

q An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
q ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range.
q ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON.

q Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
q ASCD steering switch q ECM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-586

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS00245

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-589, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-587

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

NBS00246

Revision: 2005 November

EC-588

TBWM1246E
2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

Sensor ground

(MAF sensor, IAT sensor,

67 B

ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ASCD steering switch,

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Refrigerant pressure sen-

sor)
E
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 4V
q ASCD steering switch: OFF

[Ignition switch: ON] q MAIN switch: Pressed

Approximately 0V

99 G/OR ASCD steering switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q CANCEL switch: Pressed

Approximately 1V
G

[Ignition switch: ON] q RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed

Approximately 3V

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 2V

q SET/COAST switch: Pressed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS00247

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.

Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-589

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "MAIN SW", "RESUME/ACC SW", "SET SW" and "CANCEL SW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.

Switch MAIN switch

Monitor item MAIN SW

CANCEL switch

CANCEL SW

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

RESUME/ACC SW

SET/COAST switch SET SW

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Indication ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

SEC006D

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.

Switch

Condition

Voltage [V]

MAIN switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 1 Approx. 4

CANCEL switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 1 Approx. 4

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 3 Approx. 4

SET/COAST switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 2 Approx. 4

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between ASCD steering switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0311E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-590

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Combination switch (spiral cable)

q Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch

C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and ASCD steering switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Combination switch (spiral cable)

q Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch I

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-592, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-591

2006 Q45

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Component Inspection
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect ASCD steering switch.
2. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 1 and 2 with pushing each switch.

Switch MAIN switch
CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Resistance [] Approx. 0
Approx. 4,000 Approx. 250 Approx. 4,000 Approx. 1,480 Approx. 4,000 Approx. 660 Approx. 4,000

If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.

NBS00248 SEC008D

Revision: 2005 November

EC-592

2006 Q45

DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION

DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:18995
A
NBS00249

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:

q If DTC P1568 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC

U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

q If DTC P1568 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.

Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .

q If DTC P1568 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. D Refer to EC-489, "DTC P0605 ECM" .

DTC No.

Trouble Diagnosis Name

DTC Detecting Condition

Possible Cause
E

P1568 1568

ICC function

q Harness or connectors

(The CAN communication line is open or

ECM detects a difference between signals from ICC unit is out of specified range.

shorted.)

q ICC unit

q ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

G
NBS0024A

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Step 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test

is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. K
3. Press MAIN switch on ICC steering switch.

4. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).

5. Press SET/COAST switch.

6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-593, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. REPLACE ICC UNIT

SEF058Y NBS0024B

1. Replace ICC unit. 2. Perform ACS-11, "ACTION TEST" . 3. Check DTC of ICC unit. Refer to ACS-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-593

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ICC brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for the ICC function.

PFP:25320
NBS0024C

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB2433E NBS0024D

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

BRAKE SW1 (ICC brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

BRAKE SW2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0024E

This diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: q If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-489 .
q This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

P1572 1572

ICC brake switch B)

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ICC brake switch are sent to ECM at the same time.
ICC brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving

q Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
q Harness or connectors (The ICC brake switch circuit is shorted.)
q Stop lamp switch q ICC brake switch q ICC brake hold relay q Incorrect stop lamp switch installation q Incorrect ICC brake switch installation q ECM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-594

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NBS0024F
A

NOTE: q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

q Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C
detected.

TESTING CONDITION: Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE lamp lights up.

4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the

following conditions.

VHCL SPEED SE Selector lever

More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Suitable position

If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-597, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.

G
H
PBIB2386E

5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

Selector lever

Suitable position

Depress the brake pedal for more than

Driving location

five seconds so as not to come off from

the above-mentioned vehicle speed.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-597, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-595

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH

NBS0024G

Revision: 2005 November

EC-596

TBWM1247E
2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

101 R/W

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF]

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

(11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 0V

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

108 Y/PU

ICC brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Fully released

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

NBS0024H

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CON-

SULT-II.

3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION

INDICATION

When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF

When brake pedal: Fully released

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed
When brake pedal: Fully released
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

SEC011D
K L M
MBIB0061E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-597

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 13.
3. CHECK DTC WITH ICC UNIT
Refer to ACS-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.

SEC013D PBIB1537E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-598

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH
4. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ICC brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ICC brake hold relay. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ICC brake hold relay terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-599

D
PBIB2433E
E

G
H
PBIB0857E
I
J

K L

PBIB2427E

MBIB0059E
2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q 10A fuse q Harness connectors M15, E205 q Harness for open or short between ICC brake hold relay and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 3 and ICC brake switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E205, M15 q Harness connectors M61, M401 q Harness for open or short between ICC brake hold relay and ICC brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY
Refer to EC-602, "Component Inspection" .
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ICC brake hold relay.
10. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ICC brake switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-600

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ICC brake switch and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-602, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ICC brake switch.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14.
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q 10A fuse q Harness connectors M61, M401 q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

G H

PBIB2433E

K L

M
PBIB2102E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-601

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH

15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16.
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-602, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ICC BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector. 3. Check continuity between ICC brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ICC brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

NBS0024I PBIB1536E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-602

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH

STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY 1. Apply 12V direct current between ICC brake hold relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 4, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.

Condition

Between terminals

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

3 and 4 6 and 7

No current supply

3 and 4 6 and 7

3. If NG, replace ICC brake hold relay.

Continuity Should not exist
Should exist Should exist Should not exist

D
PBIB2103E
E

G H

MBIB0063E

K L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-603

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

PFP:25320
NBS0024J

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB2433E NBS0024K

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

BRAKE SW2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0024L

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: q If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-489
q This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

P1572 1572

ASCD brake switch

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the ECM at the same time.
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.

q Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
q Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
q Stop lamp switch q ASCD brake switch q Incorrect stop lamp switch installation q Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation q ECM

Revision: 2005 November

EC-604

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NBS0024M
A

NOTE: q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION: Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE lamp lights up.

4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the

following conditions.

VHCL SPEED SE Selector lever

More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Suitable position

If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-607, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.

G
H
PBIB2386E

5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

Selector lever

Suitable position

Depress the brake pedal for more than

Driving location

five seconds so as not to come off from

the above-mentioned vehicle speed.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-607, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-605

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

NBS0024N

Revision: 2005 November

EC-606

TBWM1248E
2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

101 R/W

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF]

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

(11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 0V

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

108 Y/PU

ASCD brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Fully released

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

NBS0024O

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION

INDICATION

When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF

When brake pedal: Fully released

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Slightly depressed When brake pedal: Fully released

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

K
SEC011D
L
M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0061E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-607

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION
When brake pedal: Fully released
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 8.

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

SEC013D PBIB1537E

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-608

PBIB2433E
PBIB0857E
2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1

q 10A fuse

q Harness connectors M61, M401

q Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse C

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M401, M61

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Refer to EC-611, "Component Inspection"

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-609

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.

PBIB2433E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q 10A fuse q Harness connectors M61, M401 q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

PBIB2102E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-610

2006 Q45

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-611, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

A EC
C D E F G
NBS0024P
H I J K L
PBIB1536E
M
PBIB2103E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-611

2006 Q45

DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

PFP:31036

Component Description

NBS0024Q

The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ICC control. Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for ICC functions.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0024R

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-474, "DTC P0500 VSS" .
q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-489, "DTC P0605 ECM" .

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1574 1574

ICC vehicle speed sensor

ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range.

q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
q Combination meter q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit q Wheel sensor q TCM q ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0024S

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH). 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-613, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-612

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-38, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-7, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END

NBS0024T
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-613

2006 Q45

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

PFP:31036

Component Description

NBS0024U

The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0024V

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1574 1574

ASCD vehicle speed sensor

ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range.

q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
q Combination meter q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit q Wheel sensor q TCM q ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0024W

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-615, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-614

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-38, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-7, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END

NBS0024X
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-615

2006 Q45

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:31935

Description

NBS00255

ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

NBS00256

MONITOR ITEM I/P PULLY SPD

CONDITION q Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)

SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS00257

NOTE: q If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

q If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1010 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
q If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-489, "DTC P0605 ECM" .

q If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0335, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335. Refer to EC-370, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" .

q If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340. Refer to EC-379, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" .
The MIL will not lights up for this diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1715 1715

Input speed sensor (Turbine revolution sensor) (TCM output)

Turbine revolution sensor signal is different from the theoretical value calculated by ECM from revolution sensor signal and engine rpm signal.

q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
q Harness or connectors (Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q TCM

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

NBS00258

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-38, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. REPLACE TCM

Replace TCM. Refer to AT-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-616

2006 Q45

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve actuator. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator.

PFP:14955
A
NBS0025I
EC
C

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB2421E
E
NBS0025J

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

q Selector lever: P or N

VIAS S/V

q Engine speed: More than 5,000 rpm q Selector lever: Except P or N q Engine speed: Less than 5,000 rpm

SPECIFICATION

ON
G
OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0025K

The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

P1800

VIAS control solenoid valve cir- An excessively low or high voltage signal (The solenoid valve circuit is open or

1800

cuit

is sent to ECM through the valve

shorted.)

q VIAS control solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0025L

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-619, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-617

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram

NBS0025M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-618

TBWM1263E
2006 Q45

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

0 - 1.0V

q Selector lever: P or N

[Engine is running]

29 PU

VIAS control solenoid valve q Selector lever: D

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed: Below 5,000 rpm

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed: Above 5,000 rpm

0 - 1.0V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

NBS0025N
I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB2421E

PBIB0173E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-619

2006 Q45

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM relay

>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-620, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Perform "VIAS SOL VALVE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.

Condition VIAS SOL VALVE
ON
OFF

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Operation takes less than 1 second.

Air passage continuity between A and C
No
Yes

NBS0025O

PBIB0177E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-620

2006 Q45

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Operation takes less than 1 second.

Air passage continuity between A and C
No
Yes

Removal and Installation
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

A EC
C D
MEC488B NBS0025P
E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-621

2006 Q45

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

PFP:25320

Description

NBS0025Q

Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS0025R

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

BRAKE SW

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0025S

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

DTC No.
P1805 1805

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Brake switch

A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.

q Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
q Stop lamp switch

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.

Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.Therefore, acceleration will be poor.

Vehicle condition

Driving condition

When engine is idling

Normal

When accelerating

Poor acceleration

DTC Confirmation Procedure
WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-624, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NBS0025T

WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-622

PBIB1952E
2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

NBS0025U
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-623

TBWM1249E
2006 Q45

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

101 R/W

Stop lamp switch

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

NBS0025V

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.

Brake pedal

Stop lamp

Fully released

Not illuminated

Slightly depressed

Illuminated

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-624

PBIB2433E PBIB2102E
2006 Q45

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q 10A fuse q Harness connectors M61, M401 q Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop
lamp switch terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-626, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

A EC
C D E F G H
PBIB2433E
I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-625

2006 Q45

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

Component Inspection
STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.

Conditions

Continuity

Brake pedal: Fully released

Should not exist.

Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

Should exist.

4. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

NBS0025W PBIB2103E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-626

2006 Q45

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description

PFP:16119
A
NBS001ZV

Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle

control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC

an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition

switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not

provided to the ECM. C

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS001ZW

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

D
SPECIFICATION

THRTL RELAY

q Ignition switch: ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001ZX

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

P2100

Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for

(Throttle control motor relay circuit is

2100

relay circuit open

throttle control motor is excessively low.

open)

q Throttle control motor relay

q Harness or connectors

P2103

Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is

(Throttle control motor relay circuit is

2103

relay circuit short

stuck ON.

shorted)

q Throttle control motor relay

I
FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return

spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure

K
NBS001ZY

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR""mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-630, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-627

SEF058Y
2006 Q45

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-630, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-628

2006 Q45

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Wiring Diagram

NBS001ZZ
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-629

TBWM1238E
2006 Q45

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Throttle control motor relay power supply

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V

4 L/W

Throttle control motor (Close)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Released

5 L/B

Throttle control motor (Open)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0 - 14V

PBIB1104E

104 OR

Throttle control motor relay

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector.

PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V
NBS00200

3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-630

PBIB0031E
PBIB0097E
2006 Q45

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q 15A fuse

q Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and battery

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. C
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 5.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E32, F32

q Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
J 1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Harness connectors E33, F33 q Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Refer to EC-632, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-631

2006 Q45

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2. 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.

Conditions 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No current supply
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.

Continuity Yes No

NBS00201

PBIB0098E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-632

2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description

PFP:16119
A
NBS001ZO

NOTE:

If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or 2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100 EC or P2119. Refer to EC-627, "DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" or EC-645,

"DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" .

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-

back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in

response to driving condition.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001ZP

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2101 2101

q Harness or connectors

Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or

performance

ate properly.

shorted)

q Electric throttle control actuator
G

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return

spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure

I
NBS001ZQ

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine K is running.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-635, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-633

2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Wiring Diagram

NBS001ZR

Revision: 2005 November

EC-634

TBWM1237E
2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

Throttle control motor relay power supply

CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V

[Ignition switch: ON]

4 L/W

Throttle control motor (Close)

q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D

q Accelerator pedal: Released

5 L/B

Throttle control motor (Open)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0 - 14V

PBIB1104E

104 OR

Throttle control motor relay

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1105E

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

0 - 1.0V

NBS001ZS

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-635

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.

Ignition switch OFF
ON
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 3.

Voltage
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector.

MBIB0028E

3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 15A fuse q Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and battery
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

PBIB0031E PBIB0097E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-636

2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 5.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E32, F32

q Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E33, F33

q Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay L

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

Refer to EC-639, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-637

2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Electric throttle control actuator terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity

Should not exist

Should exist

Should not exist

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace.

11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

PBIB2420E

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-639, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 14.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-638

PBIB2439E
2006 Q45

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

Component Inspection
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.

Conditions 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No current supply
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.

Continuity Yes No

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step.
4. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS001ZT
A

D
PBIB0098E
E

G H

PBIB0095E

NBS001ZU

K L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-639

2006 Q45

DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

PFP:16119

Component Description

NBS00202

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS00203

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P2118 2118

Throttle control motor circuit short

ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
q Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor)

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS00204

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-642, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-640

2006 Q45

DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Wiring Diagram

NBS00205
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-641

TBWM1239E
2006 Q45

DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

Throttle control motor relay power supply

CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V

4 L/W

Throttle control motor (Close)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Released

5 L/B

Throttle control motor (Open)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0 - 14V

PBIB1104E

104 OR

Throttle control motor relay

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V
NBS00206

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-642

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Electric throttle control actuator terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity

Should not exist

Should exist

Should not exist

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Refer to EC-643, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

C D
PBIB2420E
E F G H I J K

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step.
4. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

M
NBS00207

Revision: 2005 November

EC-643

PBIB0095E
2006 Q45

DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS00208

Revision: 2005 November

EC-644

2006 Q45

DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description

PFP:16119
A
NBS001ZK

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.

The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-

tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle

valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening

angle properly in response to driving condition.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS001ZL

This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2119 2119

Electric throttle control actuator does not func-

A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-

Electric throttle control

actuator

tion.
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range.

q Electric throttle control actuator

C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Malfunction A Malfunction B

The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. I

Malfunction C

While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

J
NBS001ZM

NOTE:
q Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform K PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.

q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait

at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.

4. Shift selector lever to P position.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.

7. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.

8. Shift selector lever to P position.

9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-646, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-645

2006 Q45

DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. 4. Shift selector lever to N, P position. 5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-646, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct. 2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END

SEF058Y NBS001ZN
PBIB2439E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-646

2006 Q45

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description

PFP:18002
A
NBS0025X

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-

tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal

position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.

In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of

the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The

ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from

these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these

signals.

Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM

PBIB1741E

receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-

ation such as fuel cut.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

NBS0025Y

MONITOR ITEM ACCEL SEN 1

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

CONDITION Accelerator pedal: Fully released

SPECIFICATION

0.5 - 1.0V

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

4.0 - 4.8V

ACCEL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.3 - 1.2V

(engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

3.9 - 4.8V

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0025Z

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. K Refer to EC-492, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2122 2122

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or

shorted.)

P2123 2123

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

q Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-647

2006 Q45

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS00260

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-650, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-648

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

NBS00261
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-649

TBWM1250E
2006 Q45

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

82 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

83 L 90 R 91 B

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)
Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

98 R

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

106 W

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V Approximately 0V Approximately 5V Approximately 5V 0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V 0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS00262

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-650

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D
PBIB2432E
E

PBIB0914E

I J

K L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-651

2006 Q45

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-652, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Terminal
106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

Accelerator pedal Fully released Fully depressed Fully released Fully depressed

Voltage 0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V 0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-652

NBS00263
MBIB0023E
2006 Q45

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 7. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

A EC
NBS00264
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-653

2006 Q45

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

PFP:18002

Component Description

NBS00265

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-

tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal

position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.

In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of

the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The

ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from

these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these

signals.

Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM

PBIB1741E

receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-

ation such as fuel cut.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS00266

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ACCEL SEN 1

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.8V

ACCEL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.3 - 1.2V 3.9 - 4.8V

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS00267

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. P2127 2127
P2128 2128

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

q Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-654

2006 Q45

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS00268

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-657, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-655

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

NBS00269

Revision: 2005 November

EC-656

TBWM1251E
2006 Q45

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

47 L/W

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

82 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

83 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

90 R

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

91 B

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V
G

q Engine stopped

0.15 - 0.60V

98 R

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

1.95 - 2.40V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

0.5 - 1.0V

106 W

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

3.9 - 4.7V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS0026A
L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-657

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair or replace open circuit.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-656

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-663

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-658

PBIB2432E PBIB0915E
2006 Q45

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

Refer to EC-667, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 14.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> GO TO 9.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-659

2006 Q45

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

12. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 7. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

NBS0026B
MBIB0023E NBS0026C

Revision: 2005 November

EC-660

2006 Q45

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description

PFP:16119
A
NBS0026D

EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
NBS0026E

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

F
SPECIFICATION

THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Selector lever: D

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

More than 0.36V

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V

*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

H
NBS0026F

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2135 2135

q Harness or connector

(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or

shorted.)

Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM

(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)

circuit range/perfor-

compared with the signals from TP sensor 1

mance

and TP sensor 2.

q Electric throttle control actuator

(TP sensor 1 and 2)

q Accelerator pedal position sensor

(APP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

Revision: 2005 November

EC-661

2006 Q45

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0026G

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-664, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

Revision: 2005 November

EC-662

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

NBS0026H
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-663

TBWM0577E
2006 Q45

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

47 L/W

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

50 B

Throttle position sensor 1

66 R

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

69 W

Throttle position sensor 2

91 B

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Selector lever: D q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V More than 0.36V
Less than 4.75V Approximately 0V Less than 4.75V
More than 0.36V Approximately 5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS0026I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-664

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

D
PBIB2420E
E
F
G

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB0082E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. M

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-663

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-656

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-665

2006 Q45

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-667, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-666

2006 Q45

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

50 (Throttle position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

69 (Throttle position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
7. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

NBS0026J
A

PBIB1530E

G
NBS0026K
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-667

2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

PFP:18002

Component Description

NBS0026L

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-

tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal

position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.

In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of

the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The

ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from

these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these

signals.

Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM

PBIB1741E

receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-

ation such as fuel cut.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS0026M

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ACCEL SEN 1

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.8V

ACCEL SEN 2*

q Ignition switch: ON (engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.3 - 1.2V 3.9 - 4.8V

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed

ON OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS0026N

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-492, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .

DTC No.
P2138 2138

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance

Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2.

Possible cause
q Harness or connector (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-668

2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS0026O

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-671, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-669

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

NBS0026P

Revision: 2005 November

EC-670

TBWM1252E
2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

47 L/W

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

82 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

83 L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

90 R

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

91 B

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V
G

q Engine stopped

0.15 - 0.60V

98 R

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

1.95 - 2.40V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

0.5 - 1.0V

106 W

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

q Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

3.9 - 4.7V

q Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

NBS0026Q
L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-671

PBIB2417E
2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB2432E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB0914E

PBIB0915E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-672

2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor F

>> Repair or replace open circuit.

7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-670

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-663

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-667, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> GO TO 9.

9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR M 1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-673

2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 1
and ECM terminal 83. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-675, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-674

2006 Q45

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-77, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-78, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-78, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

Removal and Installation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

E
NBS0026R
F

G H

MBIB0023E

NBS0026S

Revision: 2005 November

EC-675

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

PFP:22693
NBS002Y2
SEF579Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF580Z NBS002Y3

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

CONDITION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

SPECIFICATION Fluctuates around 1.5 V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

NBS002Y4

To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.

DTC No.
P2A00 2A00 (Bank 1)
P2A03 2A03 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit range/performance

DTC detecting condition
q The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period.
q The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period.

Possible Cause
q A/F sensor 1 q A/F sensor 1 heater q Fuel pressure q Fuel injector q Intake air leaks

DTC Confirmation Procedure

NBS002Y5

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CON-
SULT-II.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-676

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
utes. 9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-681, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector. 6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected. 7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
utes. 11. Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-681, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

A EC
C
SEF968Y
D E F G H
PBIB2418E
I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-677

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

NBS002Y6

Revision: 2005 November

EC-678

TBWM1224E
2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

2 OR

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

16 W 35 R 56 R/L 75 BR

A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB1584E

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Revision: 2005 November

EC-679

2006 Q45

BANK 2

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

Revision: 2005 November

EC-680

TBWM1225E
2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

Approximately 5V

24 SB

A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

57 G/Y 58 G 76 L/W 77 GY

A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1584E

Approximately 2.6V

Approximately 2.3V

Approximately 3.1V

Approximately 2.3V

NBS002Y7

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2417E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-681

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
1. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.

Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.

PBIB3133E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-682

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

4. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.

Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?

Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.

4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-

nector.

6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.

7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No

J
PBIB2418E
K

Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-316, "DTC

P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-328, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .

No >> GO TO 5.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-683

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.

: Vehicle front

1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector

3. Check harness connector for water.

Water should not exit.

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.

2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector

PBIB3134E

PBIB1683E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-684

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Bank1

Bank 2

Continuity should exist.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Bank 1

Bank 2

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

A/F sensor 1 terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity should not exist.

5. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-179, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 11.

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-685

2006 Q45

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1

11. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: q Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-23, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

NBS002Y8

Revision: 2005 November

EC-686

2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

BRAKE SW2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

PFP:25320
A
NBS0027S
EC

D
PBIB2433E
E
NBS0027T

SPECIFICATION

OFF

ON
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-687

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

NBS0027U

Revision: 2005 November

EC-688

TBWM1260E
2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

101 R/W

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF]

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

(11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 0V

q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

108 Y/PU

ASCD brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal: Fully released

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

NBS0027V

With CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION

INDICATION

When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF

When brake pedal: Fully released

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Slightly depressed When brake pedal: Fully released

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

K
SEC011D
L
M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0061E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-689

2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

SEC013D

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8.

PBIB1537E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-690

2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q 10A fuse q Harness connectors M61, M401 q Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

A EC
C D
PBIB2433E
E F G H
PBIB0857E
I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-691

2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-611, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.

PBIB2433E

PBIB2102E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-692

2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

A EC
C D E F G H I J K
NBS0027W
L M
PBIB1536E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-693

2006 Q45

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

PBIB2103E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-694

2006 Q45

ASCD INDICATOR

ASCD INDICATOR Component Description

PFP:24814
A
NBS0027X

ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and

SET, and is integrated in combination meter.

CRUISE lamp illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD

system is ready for operation.

SET lamp illuminates when following conditions are met.

q CRUISE lamp is illuminated.

q SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of

ASCD setting.

SET lamp remains lit during ASCD control.

Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS0027Y

Specification data are reference value.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

CRUISE LAMP

q Ignition switch: ON

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time at the 2nd time

ON OFF

q MAIN switch: ON

ASCD: Operating

SET LAMP

q When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ASCD: Not operating

OFF

and 144 km/h (89 MPH)
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-695

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

ASCD INDICATOR

NBS0027Z

Revision: 2005 November

EC-696

TBWM0591E
2006 Q45

ASCD INDICATOR

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

NBS00280
A

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

ASCD INDICATOR

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

CRUISE LAMP

q Ignition switch: ON

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time at the 2nd time

ON OFF

q MAIN switch: ON

ASCD: Operating

SET LAMP

q When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ASCD: Not operating

OFF

and 144 km/h (89 MPH)

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK DTC

F Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN

COMMUNICATION LINE" .

3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION

Does combination meter operate normally?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-7, "COMBINATION METERS" .

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K

>> INSPECTION END L

Revision: 2005 November

EC-697

2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

PFP:25350

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

NBS0027K

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

LOAD SIGNAL

q Ignition switch: ON

Rear window defogger switch: ON and/or Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and lighting switch: OFF

ON OFF

HEATER FAN SW

q Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON

engine

Heater fan switch: OFF

ON OFF

Revision: 2005 November

EC-698

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

NBS0027L
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-699

TBWM1258E
2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

Revision: 2005 November

EC-700

TBWM0588E
2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

84 Y/B

Electrical load signal (Headlamp switch)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Lighting switch: 2nd position [Ignition switch: ON] q Lighting switch: OFF

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

Electrical load signal

q Rear window defogger switch: ON

(11 - 14V)

93 L/R

(Rear window defogger

switch)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 0V

q Rear window defogger switch: OFF

96 SB

Heater fan switch

[Engine is running] q Heater fan switch: ON [Engine is running] q Heater fan switch: OFF

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

NBS0027M
H

Do you have CONSULT-II?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 2.

No >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCITION-I

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check "LOAD SIGNAL" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.

Condition
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position
Lighting switch: OFF
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 8.

LOAD SIGNAL ON OFF

K L M
PBIB0103E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-701

2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground under the following conditions.

Condition
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position
Lighting switch: OFF
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8.

Voltage BATTERY VOLTAGE
0V

4. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "LOAD SIGNAL" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULTII under the following conditions.

Condition
Rear window defogger switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 11.

LOAD SIGNAL ON OFF

5. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 93 and ground under the following conditions.

Condition
Rear window defogger switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 11.

Voltage BATTERY VOLTAGE
0V

MBIB0158E PBIB0103E PBIB1773E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-702

2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

6. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II Check "HEATER FAN SW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.

Condition
Heater fan control switch: ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 14.

LOAD SIGNAL ON OFF

7. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

A
EC
C
D
PBIB1995E
E

Without CONSULT-II

Check voltage between ECM terminal 96 and ground under the fol-

lowing conditions.

Condition

Voltage

Heater fan control switch: ON

heater fan control switch: OFF
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 14.

BATTERY VOLTAGE

H
I
PBIB1219E

8. CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION J

1. Start engine.

2. Turn the lighting switch ON at 2nd position.

3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.

OK or NG

OK NG

>> GO TO 9. >> Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-36, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME

LIGHT SYSTEM -" .

9. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Stop engine. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect headlamp relay-1 harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between headlamp relay-1 terminal 5 and ECM terminal 84.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 10.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-703

2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse, fusible link and relay block (J/B) connector E3 q Harness connectors E34, F34 q Harness for open and short between headlamp relay-1 and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine. 2. Turn ON the rear window defogger switch. 3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 12. No >> Refer to GW-61, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
12. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. 4. Check harness continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals 5, 7 and ECM terminal 93.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B5, M5 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open and short between rear window defogger relay and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL FUNCTION
1. Start engine. 2. Turn ON the fan control switch. 3. Check the blower fan motor. Does the blower fan motor activate? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 15. No >> Refer to ATC-35, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-704

2006 Q45

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

15. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A

1. Stop engine.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Disconnect A/C AUTO AMP. harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between A/C AUTO AMP. terminal 29 and ECM terminal 96.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C
Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F

>> INSPECTION END G

Revision: 2005 November

EC-705

2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
Component Description
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

B/FUEL SCHDL

See EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .

INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2

q Engine: After warming up q Selector lever: P or N q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No load

Idle 2,000 rpm

PFP:16600
NBS00274
SEF375Z NBS00275
SPECIFICATION 2.0 - 3.0 msec 1.9 - 2.9 msec

Revision: 2005 November

EC-706

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

FUEL INJECTOR

NBS00276
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-707

TBWM1255E
2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

21 W/B 22 Y 23 R/L 44 BR

Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 Fuel injector No. 7

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

PBIB0042E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB0043E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-708

2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-709

TBWM1256E
2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

40 BR 41 G 42 B/R 63 L

Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 Fuel injector No. 8

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

PBIB0042E

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0043E NBS00277

PBIB0133E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-710

2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR
3. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect harness connector F21, F201 (bank 1) and F41, F221 (bank 2).

Cylinder 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector terminal F21 terminal 3 F21 terminal 2 F21 terminal 1 F21 terminal 6 F41 terminal 3 F41 terminal 2 F41 terminal 1 F41 terminal 6

ECM terminal 23 22 21 44 42 41 40 63

Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

E
PBIB2438E
F

PBIB0180E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-711

2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E32, F32 q Harness connectors F21, F201 q Harness connectors F41, F221 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connectors M143, E215 q 15A fuse q Harness for open or short between harness connector F21 and fuse q Harness for open or short between harness connector F41 and fuse q Harness for open or short between harness connector F21 and ECM q Harness for open or short between harness connector F41 and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II

Provide battery voltage between the following terminals, and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.

Cylinder
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

Harness connector F201 F221

terminal

(+)

()

2 5
1

Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB2449E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-712

2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR
6. CHECK SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A 1. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
EC

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

PBIB2423E
E

Harness connector terminal

Fuel injector terminal

F201 terminal 1

F201 terminal 2 2
F201 terminal 3
G
F201 terminal 6

F201 terminal 5

F221 terminal 1

F221 terminal 2 2
F221 terminal 3

F221 terminal 6

F221 terminal 5

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

Refer to EC-714, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace fuel injector.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-713

2006 Q45

FUEL INJECTOR Component Inspection
FUEL INJECTOR 1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5 [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
Removal and Installation
FUEL INJECTOR Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

NBS00278
PBIB1727E NBS00279

Revision: 2005 November

EC-714

2006 Q45

FUEL PUMP

FUEL PUMP
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:17042
A
NBS0027A

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*

Fuel pump control

Fuel pump relay

Battery

Battery voltage*

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows

that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when

the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,

thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump E

relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Engine running and cranking When engine is stopped Except as shown above

Condition

Fuel pump operation

Operates for 5 seconds.

Operates.

Stops in 1.5 seconds.

Stops.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The fuel pump with a fuel pressure regulator is an in-tank type (the

pump and pressure regulator are located in the fuel tank).

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

FUEL PUMP RLY

q For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON q Engine running or cranking

q Except above

K
PBIB2462E

NBS0027B
L

SPECIFICATION

OFF

Revision: 2005 November

EC-715

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

FUEL PUMP

NBS0027C

Revision: 2005 November

EC-716

TBWM1257E
2006 Q45

FUEL PUMP

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

38 G/R

Fuel pump control module (FPCM) check

[When cranking engine] [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

4 - 6V
D

[When cranking engine]

0 - 0.5V

39 B/R

Fuel pump control module (FPCM)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

8 - 12V

q Idle speed

[Ignition switch: ON]

q For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch ON

0 - 1.5V

113 GY

Fuel pump relay

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON] q More than 5 seconds after turning ignition
switch ON

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 5 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2.

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

G
H
NBS0027D
I
J
K

PBIB2440E
M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-717

2006 Q45

FUEL PUMP
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between fuel pump relay terminals 2, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0040E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connectors M143, M145 q 15A fuses q Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0185E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-718

2006 Q45

FUEL PUMP

4. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness con-

nector.

3. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector.

D
PBIB1249E
E
F

4. Check harness continuity between the following; fuel pump relay terminal 5 and fuel pump terminal 3, fuel pump terminal 1 and dropping resistor terminal 2, dropping resistor terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B211, M141 q Harness connectors B63, B263 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connector M143 q Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump q Harness for open or short between fuel pump and dropping resistor q Harness for open or short between dropping resistor and ground

PBIB0032E
I J K L M

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-719

2006 Q45

FUEL PUMP
6. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 and fuel pump relay terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 connector M143 q Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK DROPPING RESISTOR
Refer to EC-721, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace dropping resistor.
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY
Refer to EC-721, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace fuel pump relay.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-721, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace fuel pump.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-720

2006 Q45

FUEL PUMP

Component Inspection
FUEL PUMP RELAY
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.

Conditions
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
No current supply

Continuity Yes No

FUEL PUMP 1. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness connector. 2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0 [at 25°C (77°F)]

DROPPING RESISTOR Check resistance between dropping resistor terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Approximately 0.9 [at 20°C (68°F)]

Removal and Installation
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

NBS0027E
A

D
PBIB0098E
E

G
H
PBIB0186E
I
J

PBIB0100E

NBS0027F

Revision: 2005 November

EC-721

2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
ICC BRAKE SWITCH Component Description
When depress on the brake pedal, ICC brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal) Refer to ACS-6, "DESCRIPTION" for the ICC function.

PFP:25320
NBS0027N

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

BRAKE SW1 (ICC brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

BRAKE SW2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

PBIB2433E NBS0027O
SPECIFICATION ON OFF OFF ON

Revision: 2005 November

EC-722

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

NBS0027P
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-723

TBWM1259E
2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

101 R/W

Stop lamp switch

108 Y/PU

ICC brake switch

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal: Fully released

DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

NBS0027Q

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CON-
SULT-II. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Slightly depress When brake pedal: Fully released

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION
When brake pedal: Slightly depress
When brake pedal: Fully released
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

SEC011D MBIB0061E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-724

2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal: Fully released When brake pedal: Slightly depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13.
3. CHECK DTC WITH ICC UNIT
Refer to ACS-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.

A EC
C D
SEC013D
E F G H
PBIB1537E
I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-725

2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
4. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ICC brake hold relay terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-726

PBIB2433E PBIB0857E
PBIB2427E MBIB0059E
2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1

q 10A fuse

q Harness connectors M15, E205

q Harness for open or short between ICC brake hold relay and fuse C

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check harness continuity between ICC brake hold relay terminal 3 and ICC brake switch terminal 1.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. F
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E205, M15

q Harness connectors M61, M401

q Harness for open or short between ICC brake hold relay and ICC brake switch

J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY K Refer to EC-730, "Component Inspection" .

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> Replace ICC brake fold relay.

10. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ICC brake switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108. Refer Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-727

2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M401, M61 q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness for open or short between ICC brake switch and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-730, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ICC brake switch.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14.

PBIB2433E

14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) No. 1 connector M1 q 10A fuse q Harness connectors M61, M401 q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB2102E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-728

2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 4.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.

NG >> GO TO 16.

16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M401, M61

q Harness connectors M135, F105

q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-730, "Component Inspection"

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2005 November

EC-729

2006 Q45

ICC BRAKE SWITCH

Component Inspection
ICC BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ICC brake switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ICC brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ICC brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal: Fully released. When brake pedal: Slightly depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY 1. Apply 12V direct current between ICC brake hold relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 4, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.

Condition

Between terminals

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

3 and 4 6 and 7

No current supply

3 and 4 6 and 7

3. If NG, replace ICC brake hold relay.

Continuity Should not exist
Should exist Should exist Should not exist

NBS0027R PBIB1536E PBIB2103E MBIB0063E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-730

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

PFP:22448
A
NBS0026Z

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil

secondary circuit.

E
PBIB2424E
F

Revision: 2005 November

EC-731

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

IGNITION SIGNAL

NBS00270

Revision: 2005 November

EC-732

TBWM1254E
2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

switch OFF
D

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-733

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

Revision: 2005 November

EC-734

TBWM0581E
2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION [Engine is running]

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0 - 0.2V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

65 G/R 79 PU/W 80 W/R 81 W/G

Ignition signal No. 8 Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2

NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle
0.1 - 0.4V

E
PBIB0044E
F

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB0045E
H

Revision: 2005 November

EC-735

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

Revision: 2005 November

EC-736

TBWM0582E
2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION [Engine is running]

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0 - 0.2V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

46 L/R 60 GY/R 61 GY 62 Y/R

Ignition signal No. 7 Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1

NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle
0.1 - 0.4V

E
PBIB0044E
F

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II 1. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB0045E
H
NBS00271
I
J
K
L
M

PBIB0133E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-737

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Let engine idle. 2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62,
65, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below. NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB0044E

4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-146, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .

PBIB1549E MBIB0034E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-738

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM relay. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 3 and
condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 harness connector M143 q Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D
PBIB2425E
E

G
H
PBIB0624E
I
J

PBIB0040E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-739

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL
8. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 20A fuse q Fuse, fusible link and relay block (J/B) harness connector E3 q Fuse block (J/B) No. 2 harness connector E215 q Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ECM RELAY
Refer to EC-155, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ECM relay.
11. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-742, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace condenser.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-740

PBIB2078E
2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V A 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
EC

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14.

E
PBIB2424E
F G H

14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay.

PBIB0138E

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

15. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

16. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62, 65, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-741

2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

17. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-742, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.

Terminal No. (Polarity)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2

Except 0 or

1 and 3 2 and 3

Except 0

4. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure.

NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
8. Start engine.

9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.

10. Turn ignition switch OFF.
11. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.

12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.

13. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.

15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure.

16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.

Spark should be generated.

NBS00272 PBIB0847E PBIB0041E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-742

PBIB2325E
2006 Q45

IGNITION SIGNAL

CAUTION: q Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an A
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more.

q It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.

NOTE:

When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.

17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.

CONDENSER

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.

3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.

Resistance: Above 1 M [at 25°C (77°F)]

Removal and Installation
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-29, "IGNITION COIL" .

PBIB0794E

NBS00273

Revision: 2005 November

EC-743

2006 Q45

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

PFP:92136
NBS0027G
PBIB0037E

PBIB2657E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-744

2006 Q45

Wiring Diagram

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

NBS0027H
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-745

TBWM0586E
2006 Q45

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

49 L

Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

67 B

Sensor ground (MAF sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, FTT sensor, EVAP control system pressure sensor, PSP sensor, ICC steering switch, ASCD steering switch, Refrigerant pressure sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

70 P

Refrigerant pressure sensor

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Both A/C switch and blower fan motor
switch: ON (Compressor operates)

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V Approximately 0V
1.0 - 4.0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

NBS0027I

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1188E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-746

2006 Q45

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. 2. Stop engine. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

A EC
C D E F
PBIB2417E
G H I J K
PBIB0037E
L M

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E33, F33 q Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0188E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-747

2006 Q45

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E33, F33 q Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E33, F33 q Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to ATC-156, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .

NBS0027J

Revision: 2005 November

EC-748

2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:14956
A
NBS0026T

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*

Mass air flow sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor

Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature Throttle position Accelerator pedal position

C
VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
D

Battery

Battery voltage*

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

PBIB1876E

When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the

effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port

including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque generation.

The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the

signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power

valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.

Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided indepen-

dently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction

resistance under high speeds.

The power valve is always open regardless of the engine speed when selector lever position is in N or P.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-749

2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Power Valve The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve.

VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator.

PBIB2421E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

q Selector lever: P or N

VIAS S/V

q Engine speed: More than 5,000 rpm q Selector lever: Except P or N q Engine speed: Less than 5,000 rpm

PBIB2421E NBS0026U
SPECIFICATION ON OFF

Revision: 2005 November

EC-750

2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS) Wiring Diagram

NBS0026V
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-751

TBWM1253E
2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Selector lever: P or N

0 - 1.0V

29 PU

VIAS control solenoid valve

[Engine is running] q Selector lever: D q Engine speed: Below 5,000 rpm

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] q Engine speed: Above 5,000 rpm

0 - 1.0V

111 W/B

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF

0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

119 R 120 R

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Revision: 2005 November

EC-752

2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS) Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Perform "VIAS SOL VALVE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve "ON" and "OFF", and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
Without CONSULT-II 1. Lift up the vehicle. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Make sure that power valve actuator rod moves when changing
the selector lever position to N and D alternately.
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. NG (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.

NBS0026W
A EC
C D E
PBIB0844E
F G H I
PBIB2441E
J K L M
PBIB2441E

Revision: 2005 November

EC-753

2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)

2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Perform "VIAS SOL VALVE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve "ON" and "OFF", and check vacuum existence under the following conditions.

VIAS SOL VALVE

Vacuum

Should exist.

OFF

Should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4.

3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE

Without CONSULT-II 1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. 2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. 3. Start engine and let it idle. 4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2. 5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.

Condition

Vacuum

12V direct current supply

Should exist.

No supply

Should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Stop engine.
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-102, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.

PBIB0844E PBIB0845E

5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
Refer to EC-756, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace vacuum tank.
Revision: 2005 November

EC-754

SEF109L
2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)

6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valveterminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.

PBIB2421E
E
F
G

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M135, F105 q Harness continuity between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM relay

H
PBIB0173E
I
J

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-756, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.

Revision: 2005 November

EC-755

2006 Q45

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Condition VIAS SOL VALVE

Air passage continuity between A and B

Yes

OFF

Operation takes less than 1 second.

Air passage continuity between A and C
No
Yes

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Operation takes less than 1 second.

Air passage continuity between A and C
No
Yes

VACUUM TANK 1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. 2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum tank. 3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B.

NBS0026X PBIB0177E MEC488B

Removal and Installation
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

Revision: 2005 November

EC-756

PBIB0846E NBS0026Y
2006 Q45

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram

PFP:24814
A
NBS00281
EC C D E F G H I J K L M

Revision: 2005 November

EC-757

TBWM1261E
2006 Q45

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR

Revision: 2005 November

EC-758

TBWM1262E
2006 Q45

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure

PFP:00030
A
NBS00282

Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing

Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)

EC
NBS00283

Target idle speed Air conditioner: ON

No load* (in P or N position) In P or N position

Ignition timing

In P or N position

*: Under the following conditions: q Air conditioner switch: OFF q Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) q Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position

Calculated Load Value

650±50 rpm
C
700 rpm or more 12°±5° BTDC
D
E
NBS00284

Conditions At idle At 2,500 rpm
Mass Air Flow Sensor

Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

15.0 - 35.0

10.0 - 35.0

G
NBS00285

Supply voltage

Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle

1.0 - 1.2V*

Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

3.8 - 5.2 g·m/sec at idle* 16.0 - 21.5 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*

*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

Temperature °C (°F) 25 (77)
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

Resistance k 1.800 - 2.200

H
I
NBS00286
J
K
NBS00287

20 (68)

Temperature °C (°F)

50 (122)

90 (194)

Fuel Temperature Sensor

Resistance k 2.1 - 2.9
0.68 - 1.00 0.236 - 0.260

L
M
NBS0028A

20 (68) 50 (122)

Temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k 2.3 - 2.7
0.79 - 0.90

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
Refer to EC-385, "Component Inspection" .
A/F Sensor 1 Heater

NBS0028B NBS0028C NBS002Y9

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

2.3 - 4.3

Revision: 2005 November

EC-759

2006 Q45

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Throttle Control Motor
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Fuel Injector
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
Fuel Pump
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

5.0 - 7.0 Approximately 1 - 15
13.5 - 17.5 0.2 - 5.0

NBS00289 NBS0028D NBS0028E NBS0028F

Revision: 2005 November

EC-760

2006 Q45

FrameMaker SGML 5.5.6p145J Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows